WO2025065652A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents
Communication method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025065652A1 WO2025065652A1 PCT/CN2023/122960 CN2023122960W WO2025065652A1 WO 2025065652 A1 WO2025065652 A1 WO 2025065652A1 CN 2023122960 W CN2023122960 W CN 2023122960W WO 2025065652 A1 WO2025065652 A1 WO 2025065652A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- area
- identifier
- network device
- information
- reference position
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/02—Services making use of location information
- H04W4/021—Services related to particular areas, e.g. point of interest [POI] services, venue services or geofences
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
- H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
Definitions
- the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to communication methods and devices.
- Non-terrestrial networks have significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment and no geographical restrictions. They have been widely used in many fields such as maritime communications, positioning navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting and earth observation. NTN networks can be integrated with terrestrial networks to complement each other and form a global seamless integrated communication network covering sea, land, air, space and ground to meet the various business needs of users everywhere.
- NTN proposes a mobility management method based on location information, such as mobility management based on the distance between the terminal device and the reference point of the source cell and the reference point of the target cell.
- the signaling overhead of the network side performing mobility-related configuration (such as the reference point of the cell) is relatively large.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device that can reduce signaling overhead.
- a communication method which can be executed by a terminal device, or by a component of the terminal device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the terminal device, or by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- the method includes: receiving first information from a first network device, the first information indicating information of a region, the region is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the region is determined by an identifier of the region; determining an identifier of the first region according to the location information of the terminal device and the first information, the first region being the region where the terminal device is located; and performing mobility management according to the identifier of the first region.
- the ground can be discretized into some fixed areas relative to the earth, and the geographical locations of these areas can be determined by the identification of the areas. Therefore, the network device can indicate the information of the area (such as indicating the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area) to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can obtain the distribution of the area based on the information of the area, thereby determining the area where the terminal device is located according to the location information of the terminal device and the distribution of the area, and performing mobility management based on the area where the terminal device is located.
- the signaling overhead can be reduced.
- the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius R spot of an area.
- the terminal device can learn the total number of area identifiers, thereby learning the geographical location of each area according to the area identifier, and further learning the regional distribution.
- the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference area, elevation information, ephemeris information of a first network device, or ephemeris information of a second network device.
- the reference area is an area in a first cell
- the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device;
- the elevation information indicates a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or indicates a minimum elevation angle corresponding to an area in the first cell.
- mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: determining a reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; determining the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the first area, ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle; before the remaining service time of the first cell ends, starting neighboring cell measurement.
- the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
- mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: determining a reference position in the reference area according to the identifier of the reference area and the total number of areas; determining the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the reference area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle; before the remaining service time of the first cell ends, starting neighboring cell measurement.
- the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
- the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
- this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
- mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: determining a reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; and performing neighboring area measurement on the second network device within a first time window.
- the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between the first delay and the second delay
- the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device.
- delay and the second delay is a propagation delay between a reference location in the first area and the second network device.
- the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurements within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located at different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device varies with time. Therefore, this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
- the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an area pattern, an identifier of a reference area, or a first threshold.
- the area pattern indicates an identifier of at least one second area, where the second area is an area served by a beam of the first network device; the reference area is an area in the first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
- mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: performing neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the identifier of at least one second area does not include the identifier of the first area; or, the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identifier of the first area, and the third area is an edge area of at least one second area; or, the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the difference between the identifier of the first area and the identifier of the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold.
- the condition for triggering neighbor cell measurement is related to the location of the terminal device, and when the terminal device is in different locations, the above conditions may be satisfied differently. Therefore, this solution can be applied to the scenario where the movement of the terminal device triggers cell reselection.
- the first information also indicates the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding to at least one fourth area
- the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be covered by the first network device
- the access information is used for the terminal device in the fourth area to access the second network device.
- the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble code; the target beam is a beam of the second network device.
- the first network device can indicate the identifier of the fourth area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device in the fourth area can access other network devices according to the access information.
- the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different fourth areas, so that terminal devices in different fourth areas can access other network devices on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving access success rate.
- the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a subheader of a media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region is located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, and the access information corresponding to the fourth region is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
- mobility management is performed based on the identifier of the first area, including: determining whether the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area; if the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area, accessing the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
- the total number of areas is the total number of areas where the second network device is effective, and/or the radius of the area is the radius of the area where the second network device is effective.
- mobility management is performed based on an identifier of the first area, including: receiving second information from a second network device based on the identifier of the first area, the second information indicating access information corresponding to the first area, the access information being used for terminal devices in the first area to access the second network device; and accessing the second network device based on the access information corresponding to the first area.
- the second network device can indicate the access information corresponding to each area, so that the terminal device in the area can access the second network device according to the access information.
- the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different areas, so that the terminal devices in different areas can access the second network device on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
- a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first network device, or by a component of the first network device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the first network device, or by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first network device.
- the method includes: obtaining first information, the first information indicating information of a region, the region is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the region is determined by an identifier of the region; sending the first information to a terminal device.
- the technical effects brought about by the second aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the above-mentioned first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
- the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius R spot of an area.
- the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an identifier of the reference area, elevation information, The ephemeris information or the ephemeris information of the second network device.
- the reference area is an area in the first cell, and the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; the elevation angle information indicates the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or indicates the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the area in the first cell.
- the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an area pattern, an identifier of a reference area, or a first threshold.
- the area pattern indicates an identifier of at least one second area, where the second area is an area served by a beam of the first network device; the reference area is an area in the first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
- the first information also indicates the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding to at least one fourth area
- the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be covered by the first network device
- the access information is used for terminal devices in the fourth area to access the second network device.
- the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble code; the target beam is a beam of the second network device.
- the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a subheader of a media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region is located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, and the access information corresponding to the fourth region is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
- the technical effects brought about by any possible design of the second aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the corresponding design in the above-mentioned first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
- the geographical location of the region is also determined based on at least one of the following: the radius of the region, the radius of the earth, and the total number of regions.
- the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be the same for each region, that is, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be considered constants.
- the variable that affects the geographical location of the region can be considered to be the identifier of the region.
- the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
- i represents the identifier of the area
- RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position
- Re represents the radius of the earth
- [x] represents the decimal part of x
- N spot represents the total number of areas.
- the unit square refers to the square in the Cartesian plane with vertices at (0,0), (1,0), (0,1) and (1,1)
- RL( xi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position on the x-axis of the unit square
- RL( yi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position on the y-axis of the unit square.
- RL( xi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the x-axis direction of the Cartesian coordinate system
- RL( yi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the y-axis direction of the Cartesian coordinate system
- the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
- i the identification of the area
- RL(i) the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position
- Re the radius of the earth
- N spot the total number of areas.
- lon(i) represents the longitude of the reference location
- lat(i) represents the latitude of the reference location
- N spot represents the total number of areas.
- the radius of the area and the total number of areas satisfy the following relationship:
- Re represents the radius of the earth
- N spot represents the total number of areas
- R spot represents the radius of the area
- the coordinates of the reference position in the area can be quickly and accurately determined according to the identification of the area, so that the outline, geographical location, etc. of the area can be quickly and accurately determined.
- the radius of the area can be flexibly adjusted to adapt to different load capacities, such as adapting to different beam radii.
- information exchange can be carried out between network devices and terminal devices based on the identification of the area.
- the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced; compared with the division method based on the H3 geographic grid, since the total number of areas is relatively small, the number of bits required to indicate the area identification is also small, which can also reduce the signaling overhead.
- a communication device for implementing various methods.
- the communication device may be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or, the communication device may be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
- the communication device includes a module, unit, or means corresponding to the implementation method, and the module, unit, or means may be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing the corresponding software implementation.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
- the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
- the processing module may be used to implement the processing function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
- the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module, respectively used to implement the receiving function and the sending function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
- the transceiver module may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
- a communication device comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any aspect.
- the communication device can be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or the communication device can be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
- a communication device comprising: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction so that the communication device executes the method described in any aspect.
- the communication device can be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or the communication device can be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
- a communication device comprising: at least one processor; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction stored in a memory so that the communication device performs the method described in any aspect.
- the memory may be coupled to the processor, or may be independent of the processor.
- the communication device may be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or the communication device may be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
- a computer-readable storage medium in which a computer program or instruction is stored.
- the communication device can execute the method described in the first aspect and any possible design thereof.
- a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a communication device, enables the communication device to Perform the method described in any aspect and any possible design thereof.
- a communication device for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system
- the communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any aspect and any possible design thereof.
- the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
- the device when it is a chip system, it can be composed of a chip or include a chip and other discrete devices.
- the communication device provided in any one of the third aspect to the ninth aspect is a chip
- the sending action/function of the communication device can be understood as output information
- the receiving action/function of the communication device can be understood as input information
- the technical effects brought about by any design method in the third to ninth aspects can refer to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the first or second aspects, and will not be repeated here.
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of beam coverage in a non-staring mode and a staring mode in an NTN provided by the present application;
- FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a projection of a beam on the ground provided by the present application.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a regional description method based on an H3 geographic grid provided by the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a group switching scenario provided by the present application.
- FIG6 is a satellite network architecture diagram in a transparent transmission mode provided by the present application.
- FIG7 is a satellite network architecture diagram in a regeneration mode provided by the present application.
- FIG8 is a diagram of a satellite network architecture in another regeneration mode provided by the present application.
- FIG9 is a diagram of a satellite network architecture in another regeneration mode provided by the present application.
- FIG10 is a network architecture diagram of NTN and terrestrial network integration provided by the present application.
- FIG12 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG13 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG14 is a schematic diagram of an elevation angle provided by the present application.
- FIG15 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG18 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a terminal switching scenario provided by the present application.
- Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a MAC PDU provided by this application.
- FIG21 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG22 is a schematic diagram of a switching process provided by the present application.
- FIG23 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by the present application.
- FIG24 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided by the present application.
- FIG25 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided in the present application.
- plural means two or more than two.
- At least one of the following or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
- at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
- words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the quantity and execution order, and words such as “first” and “second” do not necessarily limit the difference.
- NTN Non-terrestrial networks
- the fifth generation (5G) new radio has entered the commercial deployment stage from the standardization stage.
- the NR standard is mainly designed for the characteristics of terrestrial communications, which can provide user terminals with high-speed, high-reliability, and low-latency communications.
- NTN communications Compared with terrestrial communications, NTN communications have significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment and no geographical restrictions. They have been widely used in maritime communications, positioning navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting and earth observation. NTN networks can be integrated with terrestrial networks to complement each other and form a global seamless integrated communication network covering sea, land, air, space and ground to meet the various business needs of users everywhere.
- NTN can include a low altitude platform (LAP) subnetwork, a high altitude platform (HAP) subnetwork, and a satellite communication subnetwork (SATCOM subnetwork).
- LAP low altitude platform
- HAP high altitude platform
- SATCOM subnetwork satellite communication subnetwork
- base stations or base station functions are deployed on low-altitude flying platforms (such as drones) 0.1km to 1km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; in the HAP subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on high-altitude flying platforms (such as airplanes) 8km to 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; in the SATCOM subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on satellites more than 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals.
- the satellite communication system can be divided into geostationary earth orbit (GEO) satellite communication system, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite communication system and low-earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication system.
- GEO geostationary earth orbit
- MEO medium earth orbit
- LEO low-earth orbit
- the GEO satellite communication system is also known as the synchronous orbit satellite system.
- the orbital altitude of the GEO satellite is 35786km, and its movement speed is the same as the rotation speed of the earth, that is, the GEO satellite can remain stationary relative to the ground.
- the GEO satellite communication system can provide large cell coverage, and the diameter of the cell is generally 500km.
- GEO satellite communication also has obvious disadvantages: 1) The GEO satellite orbit is far away from the earth, and the free space propagation loss is large, resulting in a tight communication link budget.
- the satellite In order to increase the transmission/reception gain, the satellite needs to be equipped with a larger diameter antenna; 2) The communication transmission delay is large, for example, there is a round-trip delay of about 500 milliseconds, which cannot meet the needs of real-time services; 3) GEO orbit resources are relatively tight, the launch cost is high, and it cannot provide coverage for the earth's polar regions.
- the orbital altitude of MEO satellites is between 2000 and 35786 km, and global coverage can be achieved with a relatively small number of satellites.
- the orbital altitude of MEO satellites is higher than that of LEO satellites, and the transmission delay is still larger than that of LEO satellite communications. Therefore, considering the advantages and disadvantages of MEO satellite communications, MEO satellites are mainly used for positioning and navigation.
- the orbital altitude of LEO satellites is between 300 and 2000 km, which is lower than that of MEO satellites. It has the advantages of small transmission delay, small transmission loss and relatively low launch cost.
- the next generation of satellite communication systems generally presents a trend of ultra-dense and heterogeneous.
- the scale of satellites has grown from 66 in the Iridium constellation to 720 in the OneNet constellation, and eventually extended to the 12,000+ Starlink ultra-dense LEO satellite constellation;
- the satellite network presents heterogeneous characteristics, from the traditional single-layer communication network to the multi-layer communication network, the functions of the communication satellite network also tend to be complex and diversified, and gradually compatible with and support functions such as navigation enhancement, earth observation, and multi-dimensional information on-orbit processing.
- Non-gazing mode (earth-moving) and gazing (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed) mode:
- non-staring mode In satellite communication systems, according to the working mode of the beam, it can usually be divided into non-staring mode and staring mode.
- the coverage of the satellite beam moves with the satellite for a period of time (such as between time t0 and time t2).
- the satellite in the staring mode, for a period of time (such as between time t0 and time t2), the satellite dynamically adjusts the beam pointing so that the beam approximately covers the same area on the ground.
- the coverage area of the beam still has a certain degree of jitter as time changes.
- the embodiment of the beam in the protocol can be a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter, or a spatial domain parameter, a spatial parameter, a spatial domain setting, a spatial setting, or quasi-colocation (QCL) information, a QCL assumption, a QCL indication, etc.
- the beam can be indicated by a transmission configuration indication (TCI) state (TCI-state) parameter, or by a spatial relation (spatial relation) parameter. Therefore, in this application, the beam can be replaced by a spatial filter, a spatial filter, a spatial parameter, a spatial parameter, a spatial setting, a spatial setting, QCL information, a QCL assumption, a QCL indication, TCI-state, a spatial relationship, etc.
- TCI transmission configuration indication
- spatial relation spatial relation
- the service area of the satellite/cell can be characterized by calculating the corresponding contours of antenna gain or received power in different areas on the ground (which can be understood as the projection of the beam on the ground) based on the antenna pattern, such as a given antenna model.
- the contour can also be understood as the beam position.
- the antenna gain pattern of the beam reference system of a single GEO satellite 72 is shown.
- the ellipse represents the projection of the beam on the ground, or the beam position.
- the profile of the beam of the LEO satellite in the latitude and longitude plane in the non-staring mode is shown.
- the wave position can be considered to be statically bound to the beam. Therefore, this solution is usually used in GEO satellite networks or satellite networks in non-staring mode. However, in the staring mode, the inclination angle between the satellite and a certain area of the ground changes dynamically, and the beam projection also changes accordingly. The solution of statically binding the wave position to the beam may no longer be applicable.
- the projection of the beam on the ground is regarded as the wave position, parameters such as the beam reference point, the outline of the beam coverage area, and the satellite motion vector are usually required to determine the specific location of the wave position, which requires a large signaling overhead.
- the surface of the earth can be divided into regular pentagonal or regular hexagonal grids based on the H3 geographic grid, and the grid is used to represent the service area of the satellite/cell.
- the service area of the satellite/cell may include one or more grids.
- Each grid can be understood as a wave position.
- the earth is regarded as an icosahedron, each face of which is a spherical triangle with 12 vertices, which is called a spherical icosahedron.
- Each face of the spherical icosahedron has hexagons arranged in the same manner.
- This second possible implementation supports hierarchical addressing of wave positions.
- FIG3 there are three types of regular hexagons of small, medium, and large areas, wherein the regular hexagon with the smallest area represents the wave position, and the regular hexagons of the remaining two areas can be used for hierarchical addressing of the wave position.
- the following embodiments refer to the regular hexagons with the largest area and the second largest area as the first regular hexagon and the second regular hexagon, respectively.
- the index of the first regular hexagon when performing hierarchical addressing of wave positions, can be understood as the first-level index of the wave position, the index of the second regular hexagon can be understood as the second-level index of the wave position, and the index of the regular hexagon with the smallest area can be understood as the third-level index of the wave position.
- the first regular hexagon to which the wave position belongs can be first determined according to the first-level index, and then the second regular hexagon to which the wave position in the first regular hexagon belongs can be determined according to the second-level index, and finally the wave position in the second regular hexagon can be determined according to the third-level index.
- the wave position radius is an integer and the beam radius is not an integer, the wave position may not be accurately used to represent the service area of the satellite/cell.
- the index value of the wave position is usually indicated by 64 bits, and the signaling overhead is also large.
- the movement of the satellite may cause group switching of connected terminal devices in a certain area, or group reselection of idle terminal devices in the area.
- UE-G1 which includes multiple UEs
- the sub-area 1 is served by one or more beams of satellite 2.
- the movement of satellite 2 causes satellite 2 to be unable to continue to serve sub-area 1, and one or more beams of satellite 1 take over satellite 2 to serve sub-area 1.
- the satellite covering sub-area 1 changes, multiple UEs in UE-G1 undergo group handover, switching from satellite 2 to satellite 1.
- the frequency of group switching is relatively high, about once every several seconds to several tens of seconds.
- Mobility management mainly includes cell switching, cell reselection, registration update and tracking area update.
- cell switching as an example, as shown in Figure 5, the cell switching process in the NR system mainly includes the following steps:
- the source base station such as the next generation node B (gNodeB or gNB)
- the terminal device measures the cell signal quality according to the measurement configuration.
- the cell signal quality can be represented by reference signal receiving power (RSRP) and/or reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ).
- the terminal device reports the measurement result to the source base station.
- the terminal device can report periodically or based on event triggering.
- the reporting triggering event can be that the signal quality of the serving cell is less than threshold 1, and/or the signal quality of the neighboring cell is greater than threshold 2.
- the source base station selects a suitable neighboring cell as the target cell based on the measurement results, and sends a handover request to the target base station, which carries context information related to the user handover.
- Admission control After receiving the handover request, the target base station performs admission control. If the terminal device is allowed to access, it sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station, which carries relevant information for the terminal device to access the target cell. After receiving the handover request confirmation message, the source base station sends a radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which carries relevant information for accessing the target cell.
- RRC radio resource control
- Handover execution After receiving the handover-related information, the terminal device completes the access process in the target cell.
- the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the target cell to initiate random access in the target cell.
- the random access preamble used by the terminal device during the handover process is a dedicated preamble, which is different from the contention-based random access preamble during initial access.
- the period of the random access channel (RACH) configured by the network during cell handover can be 10/20/40/80/160 milliseconds (ms).
- the base station sends neighboring cell-related measurement configuration and other parameters in broadcast form.
- the terminal device compares the signal quality measurement value with the parameters sent by the network (such as the reselection threshold, etc.), and autonomously reselects to the target neighboring cell if the reselection conditions are met.
- NTN proposes to implement mobility management under the NTN network based on information such as time and location (such as the distance between the terminal device and the reference point of the source cell and the reference point of the target cell).
- the present application provides a communication method.
- the ground can be discretized into some fixed areas relative to the earth, and the geographical locations of these areas can be determined by the identification of the areas. Therefore, the network device can indicate the information of the area (such as indicating the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area) to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can obtain the distribution of the area based on the information of the area, thereby determining the area where the terminal device is located according to the location information of the terminal device and the distribution of the area, and performing mobility management based on the area where the terminal device is located.
- the signaling overhead can be reduced.
- NTN systems such as satellite communication systems, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communication, and drones.
- HAPS high altitude platform station
- IcaN integrated communication and navigation
- GNSS global navigation satellite systems
- NTN systems can be integrated with traditional mobile communication systems.
- the mobile communication system can be a fourth generation (4G) communication system (for example, a long term evolution (LTE) system), a worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, a 5G communication system (for example, a NR system), a device-to-device (D2D) communication system, a machine-to-machine (M2M) communication system, an Internet of Things (IoT) communication system, an Internet of Vehicles communication system, and future mobile communication systems.
- 4G fourth generation
- LTE long term evolution
- WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
- 5G communication system for example, a NR system
- D2D device-to-device
- M2M machine-to-machine
- IoT Internet of Things
- the above-mentioned communication system applicable to the present application is only an example, and the communication system and communication scenario applicable to the present application are not limited to this.
- the communication system and communication scenario provided by the present application do not impose any limitation on the scheme of the present application. They are uniformly explained here and will not be repeated below.
- a communication system applicable to the solution of the present application may include at least one terminal device and at least one network device.
- terminal devices and terminal devices, terminal devices and network devices, and network devices and network devices may communicate with each other in a wired or wireless manner.
- the terminal device may be a user-side device with wireless transceiver functions, or may be a chip or chip system provided in the device.
- the terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station (MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile terminal (MT), user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
- the terminal device may be, for example, a terminal device in IoT, V2X, D2D, M2M, 5G network, or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN).
- the terminal device may be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it may also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.); it may also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons and satellites, etc.).
- the terminal device can be a drone, an IoT device (e.g., a sensor, an electric meter, a water meter, etc.), a V2X device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA) device, a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device (also called a wearable smart device), a tablet computer or a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) device, or a wearable device.
- IoT device e.g., a sensor, an electric meter, a water meter, etc.
- V2X device e.g., a V2X device
- ST wireless local area network
- WLAN wireless local area network
- SIP session
- the invention relates to wireless terminals for use in the smart grid, transportation safety, smart cities, smart homes, in-vehicle terminals, vehicles with vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication capabilities, intelligent networked vehicles, drones with unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) to UAV (UAV to UAV, U2U) communication capabilities, etc.
- V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- the network device may be a network-side device with wireless transceiver functions, or may be a chip or chip system or module provided in the device.
- the network device is located in the radio access network (RAN) of the mobile communication system and is used to provide access services for terminal devices.
- RAN radio access network
- the network device may be a wireless relay node or a wireless backhaul node.
- the network device may be a layer 1 relay device for regenerating physical layer signals (i.e., processing of wireless frequency filtering, frequency conversion, and amplification) without other higher protocol layers.
- the network device can implement part or all of the functions of a base station.
- the network device can be an evolutionary Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE or an evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), such as a traditional macro base station eNB and a micro base station eNB in a heterogeneous network scenario; or it can be a next generation node B (gNodeB or gNB) in a 5G system; or it can be a transmission reception point (TRP); or it can be a base station in a future evolved PLMN; or it can be a device that implements base station functions in IoT, V2X, D2D, or M2M.
- eNB evolved Node B
- LTE-A evolved LTE system
- gNodeB or gNB next generation node B
- TRP transmission reception point
- a base station in a future evolved PLMN or it can be a device that implements base station functions in IoT
- the network device may be a central unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU and a DU, a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU).
- the CU and the DU may be separately configured or may be included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU).
- BBU baseband unit
- the RU may be included in a radio frequency device or a radio frequency unit, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
- RRU remote radio unit
- AAU active antenna unit
- RRH remote radio head
- the network device may be a network device or a module of a network device in an open radio access network (open RAN, ORAN) system.
- ORAN open radio access network
- CU may also be referred to as open (open, O)-CU
- DU may also be referred to as O-DU
- CU-CP may also be referred to as O-CU-CP
- CU-UP may also be referred to as O-CU-UP
- RU may also be referred to as O-RU.
- Any of the CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
- the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, etc., and the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
- the network device in the embodiment of the present application can be deployed on a non-ground platform, for example, deployed on a low-altitude platform (such as a drone), a high-altitude platform (such as an airplane), or a satellite. Therefore, the network device in the embodiment of the present application can also be referred to as a non-ground network device.
- the communication system may also include an NTN network.
- NTN gateway (or gateway station).
- NTN gateway is deployed on the ground.
- NTN gateway can communicate with satellite, and the link between satellite and NTN gateway can be called feeder link.
- the NTN gateway when the satellite is used as a wireless relay node, or the satellite has a relay forwarding function, the NTN gateway has the function of a base station or part of the base station function, and the NTN gateway can be used as a base station. Alternatively, the NTN gateway can be deployed separately from the base station, that is, in addition to the NTN gateway, the communication system also includes a satellite base station deployed on the ground.
- Figure 6 takes the NTN gateway and the base station as an example for explanation.
- the satellite when the satellite can realize part or all of the functions of the base station, the satellite has data processing capabilities and can be used as a base station.
- the NTN gateway and the satellite can transmit the user plane data of the terminal device through the satellite radio interface (SRI).
- SRI satellite radio interface
- the satellite can realize part or all of the functions of the base station, as shown in Figure 8, there is an inter-satellite link (ISL) between different satellites, and the satellites can communicate through the ISL.
- the satellite can have the DU processing function of the base station, or the satellite can act as a DU.
- the CU processing function of the base station can be deployed on the ground, and the CU and DU communicate using the F1 interface through the NTN gateway.
- NG refers to the interface between the base station and the core network.
- Uu refers to the interface between the base station and the terminal device.
- Xn refers to the interface between base stations. It is understandable that, with the evolution of the communication system, the interface name between the base station and the core network, the interface name between the base station and the terminal device, and the interface name between the base stations may also change, and this application does not specifically limit this.
- the satellite when a satellite acts as a wireless relay node and has a relay forwarding function, the satellite can be considered to be operating in a transparent mode.
- the satellite When a satellite has data processing capabilities and can realize some or all of the functions of a base station, the satellite can be considered to be operating in a regenerative mode. For a certain satellite, it can support only the transparent mode or only the regenerative mode, or it can support both the transparent mode and the regenerative mode, and can switch between the transparent mode and the regenerative mode.
- NTN and the ground network can be integrated.
- FIG10 is a diagram of the integrated network architecture of NTN and the ground network provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- satellite 1 and satellite 2 work in regeneration mode, and the satellites can be used as NTN base stations, or NTN base stations can be deployed on satellites.
- Satellite 3 works in transparent transmission mode, so additional NTN base stations need to be deployed.
- NTN base stations refer to base stations in NTN.
- NTN base stations refer to base stations in NTN.
- the architecture may also include ground base stations, which refer to base stations in the ground network.
- NTN base stations and ground base stations can be interconnected through a common core network.
- the core network provides an interface to the data network, provides communication connection, authentication, management, policy control for terminal devices, and completes the bearing of data services.
- the core network may include access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, authentication server function (AUSF) network elements, policy control function (PCF) network elements, user plane function (UPF) network elements, and other network elements.
- AMF access and mobility management function
- SMF session management function
- AUSF authentication server function
- PCF policy control function
- UPF user plane function
- the NTN base station and the ground base station can also achieve more timely assistance and interconnection through the interface defined between the base stations.
- the interface between the base stations can be an Xn interface
- the interface between the base station and the core network can be an NG interface.
- the interface between the base stations and the interface between the base station and the core network can also be implemented in other ways, which are not specifically limited in this application.
- the satellite can provide services to the terminal device through a beam.
- different beams can provide services to the terminal device through one or more of time division, frequency division and space division.
- the satellite can operate in a regeneration mode or a transparent transmission mode.
- the satellite can operate in a non-staring mode or a staring mode.
- the satellite can be a LEO satellite, a MEO satellite, a GEO satellite, etc., without limitation.
- satellites in the architectures described in Figures 6 to 10 above can be replaced by ground payloads on other flying platforms such as drones and airplanes.
- the communication system described in the embodiment of the present application is for the purpose of more clearly illustrating the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- a person of ordinary skill in the art can know that with the evolution of network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is also applicable to similar technical problems.
- the message names between the devices, the names of the parameters, or the names of the information are only examples. In other embodiments, they may also be other names, and the method provided in the present application does not make any specific limitations on this.
- the execution subject may execute some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application, and these steps or operations are only examples.
- the embodiments of the present application may also execute other operations or variations of various operations.
- the various steps may be executed in different orders presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it is possible that not all operations in the embodiments of the present application need to be executed.
- the above-mentioned flying platform is a satellite, that is, satellite communication in NTN is taken as an example for description.
- this method can also be applied to other scenarios in the NTN, such as LAP subnetwork or HAP subnetwork, and is not specifically limited thereto.
- the "region" in the following embodiments of the present application refers to a geographical region.
- the region is fixed relative to the earth, or it is understood that the region refers to a geographical region fixed relative to the earth.
- the region can have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographical location, etc.
- the region can be understood as a geographical area of a given height or height range.
- the region can refer to a geographical area with an altitude of 0 kilometers (km) above the ground or an altitude of about 0km (such as in the range of [-2, 2]km), or a geographical area with an average altitude.
- it can also refer to geographical areas of other specific heights or specific altitude ranges, such as a geographical area with an altitude of 10km, or a geographical area with an altitude of about 10km (such as in the range of [7, 13]km).
- the above-mentioned region fixed relative to the earth may also be called a "wave position”, “broadcast wave position”, “geographical region”, etc.
- a wave position a region fixed relative to the earth
- broadcast wave position a region fixed relative to the earth
- geographical region a region fixed relative to the earth
- the shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas of different regions may be the same or different. Different regions may have different geographical locations. Different regions may or may not overlap.
- the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline, size or geographical location of the region remains unchanged, for example, the outline, size or geographical location of the region does not change with time.
- the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline of the region and the points in the region can be described by a three-dimensional coordinate system such as earth-centered earth-fixed (ECEF) coordinates, geodetic coordinate system, earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the outline of the region in a three-dimensional coordinate system such as ECEF, geodetic coordinate system, ECI coordinate system, etc. are fixed and unchanged.
- ECEF earth-centered earth-fixed
- ECI earth-centered inertial
- the shape of the region may be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc.
- the shape of the region may also be an irregular shape, which is not limited.
- the shape of the area may be defined by a protocol or may be defined by a network device.
- the shapes of the areas defined by different network devices may be the same or different.
- the same network device may also define multiple shapes of areas.
- the size, radius, and area of the area may be defined by a protocol or may be defined by a network device.
- the size, radius, and area of the areas defined by different network devices may be the same or different.
- the same network device may also define multiple area sizes, multiple area radii, or multiple area areas.
- the earth may be divided into multiple regions, and the multiple regions may be indexed (eg, numbered).
- the geographical location of the region is determined by the identifier of the region, that is, the geographical location of the region can be obtained according to the identifier of a region, or in other words, there is a correlation between the identifier of the region and the geographical location of the region.
- the geographical location of the region can be obtained according to the identifier of the region.
- the geographical location of the area may also be determined according to at least one of the following: the total number of areas N spot , the radius of the area R spot , or the radius of the earth Re .
- the total number of regions can be understood as the total number of regions discretely located on the earth.
- the N spot regions can completely cover the earth, such as any location on the earth belongs to a certain region; or, the N spot regions can also cover some geographical locations on the earth, for example, the N spot regions may not cover the South Pole and/or the North Pole of the earth, that is, the South Pole and/or the North Pole may not exist in the region.
- the radius of the earth may be a constant, such as a value of 6378 km; or, the radius of the earth may be different for different time and space positions, for example, the radius of the earth may include an equatorial radius or a polar radius.
- the polar radius may be used; when dividing regions in non-polar regions, the equatorial radius may be used.
- the radius of the earth may include a major axis and a minor axis, and there are differences in the values of the major axis and the minor axis.
- the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth may be the same for each region, that is, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth may be considered constants.
- the variable affecting the geographical location of the region may be considered to be the identifier of the region.
- each region includes (or has) a reference position, which may be, for example, the center position of the region.
- the geographic location of a region may refer to the geographic location of the reference position in the region.
- the geographic location of the region is determined by the identifier of the region, which may be understood as follows: the reference position in the region is determined by the identifier of the region; or the geographic location of the region may be To represent the outline of the area or the range of the area, at this time, the geographical location of the reference position in the area can be determined according to the identification of the area, and then the range or outline of the area can be determined according to the geographical location of the reference position and the radius of the area.
- the association relationship between the reference position in the region and the identification of the region is determined according to the Fibonacci criterion, or in other words, the association relationship between the reference position in the region and the identification of the region satisfies the Fibonacci criterion.
- the association relationship between the reference position in the region and the identification of the region satisfies the Fibonacci criterion.
- Method 1 The three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (1):
- i represents the identifier of the area.
- Re represents the radius of the earth.
- N spot represents the total number of areas.
- RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the area, and the three-dimensional coordinates refer to the coordinates in the three-dimensional coordinate system.
- the three-dimensional coordinate system can be a spherical coordinate system, such as the ECEF coordinate system. Of course, it can also be other three-dimensional coordinate systems, such as the geodetic coordinate system, the earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, etc.
- the unit square refers to the square in the Cartesian plane with vertices at (0,0), (1,0), (0,1) and (1,1).
- RL( xi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the x-axis direction of the unit square
- RL( yi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the y-axis direction of the unit square.
- [x] represents the fractional part of x.
- RL( xi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position of the region in the x-axis direction in the Cartesian coordinate system
- RL( y ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position of the region in the y-axis direction in the Cartesian coordinate system.
- the Cartesian coordinate system refers to the Cartesian rectangular coordinate system.
- RL(i) represents the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference location, such as lon(i) represents the longitude of the reference location, and lat(i) represents the latitude of the reference location.
- N spot represents the total number of areas.
- the radius of the region and the total number of regions satisfy the following relationship (4):
- Re represents the radius of the earth
- N spot represents the total number of areas
- R spot represents the radius of the area.
- the coordinates of the reference position in the area can be quickly and accurately determined according to the identification of the area, so that the outline, geographical location, etc. of the area can be quickly and accurately determined.
- the radius of the area can be flexibly adjusted to adapt to different load capacities, such as adapting to different beam radii.
- information exchange can be carried out between network devices and terminal devices based on the identification of the area.
- the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced; compared with the division method based on the H3 geographic grid, since the total number of areas is relatively small, the number of bits required to indicate the area identification is also small, which can also reduce the signaling overhead.
- the coverage area of a network device may refer to a maximum area that the network device can cover, or in other words, the coverage area of the network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum coverage capability of the first network device.
- the coverage area of the network device changes with the movement of the network device, that is, the coverage area of the network device may be different at different times.
- the coverage area of the network device includes at least one of the above areas (ie, wave positions).
- the wave positions included in the coverage area of the network device may be different at different times.
- the solid ellipse line can represent the coverage area of the network device.
- the areas represented by all the regular hexagons in the solid ellipse line are the areas included in the coverage area of the network device.
- the service area of a network device may refer to the maximum area that a beam of the network device can serve (or cover), or in other words, the service area of the network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum service capability of the first network device.
- the service area of the network device is smaller than or equal to the coverage area of the network device.
- the service area of the first network device may be the range indicated by the solid ellipse, in which case the service area of the first network device is equal to the coverage area of the first network device; or the service area of the first network device may also be smaller than the range indicated by the solid ellipse.
- the service area of the network device changes with the movement of the network device, that is, the service area of the network device may be different at different times.
- the service area of the network device includes at least one of the above areas (ie, wave positions).
- the wavelengths included in the service area of the network device may be different at different times.
- the beam of the network device may actually serve (or cover) a part of the service area, and at different moments, the beam of the network device may serve (or cover) different areas in the service area.
- the beam of the network device serves areas x1, x2, and x3 in the service area; as shown in (b) of FIG. 11 , at time T2, the beam of the network device serves areas y1, y2, y3, and y4 in the service area.
- the area currently being served (or covered) by the beam of the network device may be referred to as an activated area, or an activated area.
- the area currently not being served (or covered) by the beam of the network device may be referred to as an inactivated area, or an inactivated area.
- the communication method may include the following steps:
- a first network device obtains first information.
- the first information indicates information of the region.
- the region is fixed relative to the earth.
- the geographical location of the region is determined by the identifier of the region. Please refer to the above description of the region, which will not be repeated here.
- the information of the first information indicating the area can be understood as: the first information indicating the division or distribution of the area.
- the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius of the area R spot .
- the total number of areas and the radius of the area can refer to the above description of the area, which will not be repeated here.
- the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area can be understood as the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area that are effective or used by a first network device; or, it can be the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area that are effective or used by a second network device.
- the second network device can be an adjacent network device to the first network device.
- the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area that are effective or used by different network devices can be the same or different, without limitation.
- the identification of the area can be obtained, for example, the area identification belongs to 1, 2, ..., N spot , and the geographical location of each area can be obtained based on the identification of each area.
- the identification of the area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3), so that the geographical location of N spot areas can be known, that is, the distribution of the areas can be known.
- the total number of regions can be determined based on the relationship between the radius of the region and the total number of regions, such as the above relationship (4), and then the geographical location of each region can be determined based on the region identification, thereby determining the distribution of the regions.
- the first information may include specific values of the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius of the area R spot .
- the protocol may predefine multiple total numbers of areas, or the network device and the terminal device may pre-negotiate multiple total numbers of areas.
- the first information may include an index of the total number of areas, which corresponds to one of the multiple total numbers of areas. For example, a total number of N areas is defined, and the first information may include an index n, n ⁇ 1,2,...,N, then the total number of areas indicated by the first information is the total number of n-th areas in the total number of N areas.
- the first network device when the first information indicates the total number of areas and/or the radius of the areas in which the first network device is effective, the first network device obtains the first information, which may include: the first network device determines or generates the first information; or, the first network device receives the first information, for example, the first network device receives the first information from a ground device, that is, the first information is generated by the ground device and sent to the first network device.
- the first network device determines or generates the first information.
- the first network device receives the first information from a core network element or an NTN base station deployed on the ground.
- the first network device acquiring the first information may include: the first network device receiving the first information from the second network device.
- the first network device sends first information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the first information from the first network device.
- the first network device may send the first information in a broadcast manner.
- the first network device sends cell system information, and the system information carries the first information.
- the first network device may send the first information to a terminal device in a unicast manner, which is not specifically limited in this application.
- any terminal device in the cell can implement or execute the function implemented by the terminal device in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal device determines an identifier of a first area according to the location information of the terminal device and the first information, wherein the first area is an area where the terminal device is located.
- the location information of the terminal device may be GNSS location information of the terminal device.
- the first area may be an area in which the reference location is closest to the terminal device among the N spot areas indicated by the first information.
- the terminal device can obtain the total number of areas N spot , and thus can obtain the identification of the area, for example, the area identification belongs to 1, 2, ..., N spot .
- the geographical location of the reference position in each area can be obtained, for example, the identification of the area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3), so that the distance between the terminal device and the reference position in each area can be obtained, and then the area to which the reference position closest to the terminal device belongs is determined as the first area.
- the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area.
- the mobility management may include at least one of the following: neighboring cell measurement, cell reselection, cell switching, etc.
- the mobility management may also include other implementations, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
- the ground can be discretized into some fixed areas relative to the earth, and the geographical locations of these areas can be determined by the identification of the areas. Therefore, the network device can indicate the information of the area (such as indicating the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area) to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can obtain the distribution of the area based on the information of the area, thereby determining the area where the terminal device is located according to the location information of the terminal device and the distribution of the area, and performing mobility management based on the area where the terminal device is located.
- the signaling overhead can be reduced.
- the terminal device can perform mobility management in the following five ways:
- Method 1 As shown in FIG13 , the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
- the terminal device determines a reference position in the first area according to an identifier of the first area.
- the identifier of the first area and the reference position in the first area may satisfy at least one of the above relationships (1) to (3). Please refer to the above related descriptions and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal device determines the remaining service time of the first cell based on the reference position in the first area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle.
- the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell.
- the elevation angle at the reference position in each area of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle.
- the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device, and the first cell may be a current service cell of the terminal device.
- the first elevation angle is a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
- the elevation angle is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle, the first area is completely covered by the first network device.
- the angle between the line of sight and the horizontal line in the vertical plane where the line of sight is located can be understood as the elevation angle.
- the elevation angle at the reference position can be understood as the angle between the line between the reference position and the position of the first network device and the horizon at the reference position.
- the elevation angle at the reference position can be used to describe the position of the first network device passing above the reference position. For example, the elevation angle at the reference position is 90°, indicating that the first network device is located directly above the reference position.
- the ephemeris information of the first network device describes the expression of the position and speed of the first network device that changes with time.
- the ephemeris information can also have other names, such as trajectory information, speed trajectory information, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
- w is the angular velocity of the first network device in a three-dimensional coordinate system (such as the geocentric inertial coordinate system ECI), and ⁇ m can be calculated based on a reference position in the first area and the ephemeris information of the first network device.
- ECI geocentric inertial coordinate system
- the terminal device starts neighbor cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first cell ends.
- the terminal device starts the neighboring cell measurement before time t2.
- starting the neighboring cell measurement can also be understood as executing the neighboring cell measurement.
- the neighboring cell measurement result can be used by the terminal device to perform cell reselection.
- the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
- the terminal device determines a reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area. Please refer to the relevant description in the above step S120411, which will not be repeated here.
- the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between the first delay and the second delay.
- the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device
- the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device.
- the position of the first network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the first network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device can be determined.
- the position of the second network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the second network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device can be determined.
- the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device is equal to the distance between the reference position in the first area and the first network device divided by the speed of light.
- the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device is equal to the distance between the reference position in the first area and the second network device divided by the speed of light.
- the reference time and the offset may be universal time chiming (UTC), or the units of the reference time and the offset may be system frame number, subframe number, time slot number, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol, etc.
- the reference time may be determined by the terminal device itself, or may be configured by the first network device, without limitation.
- the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time may also be referred to as a synchronization signal block (SSB) measurement timing configuration (SMTC) offset.
- SSB synchronization signal block
- SMTC measurement timing configuration
- the above-mentioned method 1 and method 2 may be combined.
- the terminal device may perform neighboring cell measurement on the second network device within the first time window before the remaining service time of the first cell ends.
- the first elevation angle, the ephemeris information of the first network device, or the ephemeris information of the second network device may be indicated by the first network device to the terminal device.
- the first information further indicates at least one of the following: elevation angle information, ephemeris information of the first network device, or ephemeris information of the second network device.
- the elevation angle information indicates the first elevation angle.
- the first network device may indicate at least one of the above items through other information other than the first information, without limitation.
- the first information may also indicate an identifier of a reference area.
- the reference area is an area in the first cell, or an area in the coverage area or service area of the first cell.
- the reference area may be an area where the cell center of the first cell is located.
- the above step S1203 may not be performed, and in the above step S1204, the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the reference area.
- the implementation of the terminal device performing mobility management according to the identifier of the reference area is similar to the implementation of the terminal device performing mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, and the first area in the above method 1 or method 2 can be replaced by the reference area, which will not be repeated here.
- method 1 can be applicable to the scenario where the cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
- the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurement within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located at different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device varies with time. Therefore, method 2 can also be applied to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
- Mode 3 The terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: when at least one of the following is met, the terminal device performs neighboring area measurement, or starts neighboring area measurement:
- the identifier of at least one second area does not include the identifier of the first area.
- the second area is the area served by the beam of the first network device, or the second area is the activated area.
- Condition 1) can also be understood as: at least one second area does not include the first area, or the area served by the beam of the first network device does not include the first area, or the first area is not served by the beam of the first network device.
- the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
- the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identification of the first area, and reference may be made to the above related description.
- the third area is an edge area in at least one second area.
- the edge area may be an area in the at least one second area where the distance between the reference position and the terminal device is the largest.
- the third area may also be referred to as an edge area in the at least one second area.
- the beam of the first network device serves three second areas, which are respectively recorded as second area 1, second area 2 and third area 3, if the distance between the terminal device and the reference positions in the three second areas are 10km, 20km and 15km respectively, then the third area is the second area 2.
- the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
- the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identification of the first area, and the above-mentioned relevant instructions can be referred to.
- the reference area is an area in the first cell, or an area in the coverage area or service area of the first cell.
- the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device, and the first cell can be the current service cell of the terminal device.
- the reference area can be the area where the cell center of the first cell is located.
- the position of the reference area can be determined according to the identification of the reference area.
- the difference between the identifier of the first area and the identifier of the reference area is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
- the distance between the reference position in the reference area and the position of the terminal device is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
- the distance between the location of the terminal device and the reference location in the third area is greater than or equal to the first threshold.
- the values of the first threshold under different conditions may be the same or different.
- the values of the first threshold in conditions 2) and 3) are the same, and the values of the first threshold in conditions 2) and 4) are different.
- At least one second area, reference area or first threshold may be indicated by the first network device to the terminal device.
- the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an area pattern, an identifier of the reference area or the first threshold.
- the area pattern indicates an identifier of at least one second area.
- the first network device may indicate at least one of the above items through other information other than the first information, without limitation.
- the area pattern may include an identifier of each second area in the at least one second area. That is, the area pattern includes identifiers of each area served by the beam of the first network device.
- the area pattern may be a bitmap, which includes M bits, where M is the total number of areas included in the coverage area or service area of the first network device, and M is a positive integer.
- the M bits correspond one-to-one to the M areas included in the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
- the area corresponding to the mth bit is the area served by the beam of the first network device, or the area corresponding to the mth bit is the second area or the activation area; when the mth bit is not set to a preset value, the area corresponding to the mth bit is not the area served by the beam of the first network device, or the area corresponding to the mth bit is not the second area or the activation area.
- m 1,2,...,M.
- the preset value may be 1, and correspondingly, the non-preset value may be 0; or, the preset value may be 0, and correspondingly, the non-preset value may be 1.
- the first network device may indicate the area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device to the terminal device in advance.
- the identifiers of each area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device are sent to the terminal device. Taking the example that the coverage area or service area of the first network device includes areas identified as 1 to 100, the first network device may send identifiers ⁇ 1, 2, ..., 100 ⁇ to the terminal device in advance.
- the conditions in the above-mentioned method three are related to the location of the terminal device, and when the terminal device is in different locations, the satisfaction of the above-mentioned conditions may be different. Therefore, the above-mentioned method three can be applicable to the scenario where the movement of the terminal device triggers cell reselection.
- the elliptical solid line represents the coverage area or service area of the first network device
- the regular hexagon in the elliptical solid line represents the area in the coverage area or service area.
- the first network device can also indicate at least one of the following to the terminal device: the ephemeris information of the first network device, the ephemeris information of the second network device, or the measurement information related to the reselection, such as the frequency priority, the frequency point of the neighboring area, or the antenna polarization mode of the neighboring area.
- the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
- the terminal device determines whether an identifier of at least one fourth area includes an identifier of the first area.
- the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be covered by the first network device, or in other words, the fourth area is an area within the coverage area of the first network device; or, the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be served by the beam of the first network device, or in other words, the fourth area is an area within the service area of the first network device.
- the at least one fourth area refers to part or all of the coverage area or service area of the first network device. Exemplarily, taking the coverage area of the first network device including areas 1 to 100 as an example, the at least one fourth area can be areas 20 to 30, or areas 25-40, etc., without limitation.
- step S120431 may also be understood as: the terminal device determines whether at least one fourth area includes the first area.
- the first network device before step S120431, indicates an identifier of at least one fourth area to the terminal device. Further, the first network device also indicates access information corresponding to at least one fourth area to the terminal device. The access information corresponding to the fourth area is used for the terminal device in the fourth area to access the second network device.
- the first network device may indicate the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding thereto to the terminal device through the first information. That is, the first information also indicates the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding thereto.
- the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of the target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble.
- the target beam is a beam of the second network device.
- the random access resource may include a random access occasion (RACH occasion, RO), and the RO indicates the time domain and/or frequency domain resources occupied by the random access channel (random access channel, RACH).
- RACH occasion random access occasion
- the random access preamble may be a dedicated preamble in a cell switching process.
- the access information corresponding to different fourth areas may be different, for example, the random access resources and/or second network devices corresponding to different fourth areas may be different.
- the access information corresponding to fourth area 1 includes the identifier of second network device 1 and random access resource 1
- the access information corresponding to fourth area 2 includes the identifier of second network device 2 and random access resource 2, wherein second network device 1 and second network device 2 are different network devices, and the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of random access resource 1 and random access resource 2 are different.
- the terminal device in fourth area 1 can use random access resource 1 to access second network device 1
- the terminal device in fourth area 2 can use random access resource 2 to access second network device 2.
- the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area can be carried in a media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU).
- MAC media access control
- PDU media access control protocol data unit
- FIG20 a possible frame structure of a MAC PDU is shown.
- the MAC PDU includes at least one MAC subPDU (MAC subPDU).
- the MAC subPDU is divided into a MAC subPDU including a MAC control element (CE), a MAC subPDU including a MAC service data unit (SDU), and a MAC subPDU including padding (optional).
- the MAC subPDU including a MAC CE includes a subheader and a MAC CE.
- the MAC subPDU including a MAC PDU includes a subheader and a MAC SDU.
- the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area may be located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, such as in a subheader of a MAC subPDU containing the MAC PDU;
- the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area are located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU;
- the identifier of the fourth area is located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, such as in a subheader of a MAC subPDU containing the MAC PDU; the access information corresponding to the fourth area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
- the identifiers of different fourth regions and their corresponding access information may be located in different MAC PDUs, or may be located in the same MAC PDU, without limitation.
- the identifier of the fourth region 1 and its corresponding access information are located in MAC subPDU1
- the identifier of the fourth region 2 and its corresponding access information are located in MAC subPDU2
- the fourth region 1 and its corresponding access information and the fourth region 2 and its corresponding access information are both located in MAC subPDU1.
- the first network device in addition to the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area, the first network device also indicates the identifier of the terminal device or the identifier of the terminal device group. After the terminal device in the fourth area receives the indication from the first network device, if the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes its own identifier, or includes the identifier of the terminal device group to which it belongs, the terminal device accesses other network devices according to the access information corresponding to the fourth area.
- the first network device may indicate different access information to different terminal devices or terminal device groups in the same fourth area, such as indicating different random access resources, different target network devices, etc.
- the identifier of the fourth area, the identifier of the terminal device, or the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device to the terminal device can be understood as a switching command, which is used to instruct the terminal devices in the fourth area to access other network devices.
- the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
- the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area, it means that the first network device instructs the terminal device in the first area to access other network devices or perform cell switching, so that the terminal device can access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
- accessing the second network device may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using a transmission beam corresponding to a target beam on a random access resource indicated by the access information.
- the first network device can indicate the identifier of the fourth area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device in the fourth area can access other network devices according to the access information.
- the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different fourth areas, so that terminal devices in different fourth areas can access other network devices on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
- the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area can be understood as the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area in which the first network device is effective or used.
- the first area is the area where the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
- the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area can also be the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area in which the second network device is effective or used.
- the terminal device can use the following method 5 for mobility management.
- the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
- the terminal device receives second information from the second network device according to the identifier of the first area.
- the first area is the area where the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the second network device.
- the second information indicates access information corresponding to the first area, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the first area to access the second network device.
- the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble.
- the random access resource or the random access preamble may refer to the relevant description in the above step S120431, which will not be described here.
- the target beam may be a beam corresponding to a handover (HO)-SSB of the second network device.
- HO-SSB is used for mobility management.
- the second network device may also send a traditional SSB, which may be used to access the second network device.
- the period of the traditional SSB is fixed (such as the period of the traditional SSB is generally 5/10/20/40/80/160ms), and the period of the traditional SSB is relatively short.
- the second network device may frequently send the traditional SSB to the terminal device based on the fixed period.
- the period of HO-SSB is adjustable (such as the period of HO-SSB can range from a few seconds to hundreds of seconds), the period span of HO-SSB is relatively large, and the period of HO-SSB is relatively long compared to the period of the traditional SSB.
- the second network device can send HO-SSB every few seconds or hundreds of seconds.
- the service area of the traditional SSB is different from the service area of the HO-SSB.
- the HO-SSB generally serves the area where the cell switching/cell reselection is about to be performed. As the second network device moves, the service area of the HO-SSB also changes.
- the second network device may carry the second information through a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). Further, the PDCCH may be scrambled using the identifier of the first region. Therefore, the terminal device receives the second information from the second network device according to the identifier of the first region, which may include: the terminal device parses the PDCCH according to the identifier of the first region, thereby obtaining the second information carried in the PDCCH.
- PDCCH physical downlink control channel
- the second network device may send access information corresponding to different areas through different PDCCHs.
- different PDCCHs may be encrypted using the identifiers of the corresponding areas. For example, if PDCCH#1 carries access information corresponding to area 1 and PDCCH#2 carries access information corresponding to area 2, PDCCH#1 is encrypted using the identifier of area 1 and PDCCH#2 is encrypted using the identifier of area 2.
- the access information corresponding to different areas may be different.
- the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
- the terminal device accessing the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using a transmitting beam corresponding to a target beam on a random access resource indicated by the access information.
- the terminal device first accesses the first network device and maintains the RRC connection state on the first network device. Subsequently, the first network device indicates to the terminal device the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area in which the second network device is effective or in the time domain, and the terminal device determines the area (i.e., the first area) where the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the second network device based on its own location information. Then, according to the identifier of the first area, the second information from the second network device is received, and according to the access information of the first area indicated by the second information, the second network device is accessed. That is, it can be considered that the terminal device switches from the first network device to the second network device.
- the second network device can indicate the access information corresponding to each area, so that the terminal device in the area can access the second network device according to the access information.
- the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different areas, so that the terminal devices in different areas can access the second network device on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
- the solution described in the fifth method above can be applied to the switching process shown in FIG22.
- the switching process includes the following steps:
- the terminal device sends a measurement report and/or location information of the terminal device to the first network device.
- the first network device receives the measurement report and/or location information of the terminal device from the terminal device.
- the measurement report includes a signal measurement result of a conventional SSB (such as NR-SSB).
- the location information of the terminal device may be indicated by information of the first area, such as an identifier of the first area or a reference location indication in the first area.
- the first network device may send a measurement configuration to the terminal device, and the terminal device may perform measurements according to the measurement configuration and report the measurement results.
- the first network device can perform layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM) candidate preparation.
- LTM layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility
- S2202a Network devices exchange HO-SSB and handover related configuration information.
- FIG22 takes the interaction between the first network device and the second network device as an example for explanation.
- the first network device can be understood as a source network device
- the second network device can be understood as a candidate network device.
- the configuration information may include at least one of the following: HO-SSB measurement period, measurement duration, measurement offset, ephemeris information of the network device, or access resource configuration corresponding to different time periods, such as random access preamble index, mask index, RO resources, or radio network temporary identity (RNTI).
- HO-SSB measurement period measurement duration
- measurement offset measurement offset
- ephemeris information of the network device or access resource configuration corresponding to different time periods, such as random access preamble index, mask index, RO resources, or radio network temporary identity (RNTI).
- RNTI radio network temporary identity
- the first network device sends the LTM candidate configuration and the conditional handover (CHO) trigger condition to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the LTM candidate configuration and the CHO trigger condition from the first network device.
- the LTM candidate configuration may be an LTM RRC related configuration, which may include at least one of the information described in step S2202a.
- the CHO trigger condition is used to determine whether to perform a cell handover. When the CHO trigger condition is met, the terminal device performs a cell handover, and when the CHO trigger condition is not met, the cell handover is not performed.
- the first network device may send an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, wherein the RRC reconfiguration message carries the LTM candidate configuration and/or the CHO trigger condition.
- the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the first network device.
- the first network device receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the terminal device.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization with the second network device according to the HO-SSB of the second network device.
- the terminal device may receive the HO-SSB from the second network device, and perform downlink synchronization with the second network device according to the synchronization signal carried therein.
- the terminal device obtains timing information of the second network device.
- the timing information may be a timing advance (TA).
- the terminal device may determine the TA based on the ephemeris information of the second network device, the location information of the terminal device, etc. After acquiring the timing information of the second network device, it may be considered that the terminal device and the second network device have completed uplink synchronization.
- TA timing advance
- the terminal device performs layer 1/layer 3 measurement based on HO-SSB of the second network device.
- the terminal device can perform LTM-CHO trigger event evaluation and LTM decision (LTM decision), that is, whether the measurement result meets the CHO trigger condition. If the measurement result meets the CHO trigger condition, the terminal device determines to perform cell switching; if the measurement result does not meet the CHO trigger condition, the terminal device does not perform cell switching and still maintains the RRC connection state in the first network device.
- LTM decision LTM-CHO trigger event evaluation and LTM decision
- S2206 The second network device sends the second information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the second information from the second network device.
- the second information indicates access information corresponding to the first area, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the first area to access the second network device. Please refer to the relevant description in the above step S120441, which will not be repeated here.
- the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area. Please refer to the relevant description in the above step S120442, which will not be repeated here.
- the second network device sends LTM completion response information to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the LTM completion response information from the second network device.
- the terminal device can implement cell switching and access the second network device.
- the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access resources indicated by the second network device. Therefore, the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different areas, so that terminal devices in different areas can access the second network device on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
- the methods and/or steps implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by components (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, logic modules, or software) that can be used in the terminal device; the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device may also be implemented by components (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, logic modules, or software) that can be used in the network device.
- the chip system may be composed of chips, or the chip system may include chips and other discrete devices.
- the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
- the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
- the embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the communication device according to the above method embodiment.
- each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
- the above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
- the Communication Device Figure 23 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 230.
- the communication device 230 includes a processing module 2301 and a transceiver module 2302.
- the communication device 230 can be used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device or network device.
- the communication device 230 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 23 ) for storing program instructions and data.
- the transceiver module 2302 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit for implementing a sending and/or receiving function.
- the transceiver module 2302 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
- the transceiver module 2302 may include a receiving module and a sending module, which are respectively used to execute the receiving and sending steps performed by the network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described in this document; the processing module 2301 may be used to execute the processing steps (such as determination, etc.) performed by the network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the transceiver module 2302 is used to receive the first information from the first network device, where the first information indicates information of an area, where the area is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the area is determined by an identifier of the area; the identifier of the first area is determined based on the location information of the terminal device and the first information, where the first area is the area where the terminal device is located; the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management based on the identifier of the first area.
- the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: the processing module 2301 is used to determine the reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; the processing module 2301 is also used to determine the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the first area, the ephemeris information of the first network device and the first elevation angle; the processing module 2301 is also used to start the neighboring area measurement before the remaining service time ends.
- the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
- processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: processing module 2301 is used to determine the reference position in the reference area according to the identifier of the reference area and the total number of areas; processing module 2301 is also used to determine the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the reference area, the ephemeris information of the first network device and the first elevation angle; processing module 2301 is also used to start neighboring area measurement before the remaining service time ends.
- the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
- the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
- the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: the processing module 2301 is used to determine the reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; the processing module 2301 is also used to perform neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window.
- the offset between the start time and the reference time of the first time window is the difference between the first delay and the second delay, the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device, and the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device.
- a processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to an identifier of a first area, including: a processing module 2301 is used to perform neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the identifier of at least one second area does not include the identifier of the first area; or, the distance between a reference position in the first area and a reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identifier of the first area, and the third area is an edge area of at least one second area; or, the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the difference between the identifier of the first area and the identifier of the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the reference area is
- a processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to an identifier of a first area, including: a processing module 2301 is used to determine whether an identifier of at least one fourth area includes an identifier of the first area; and the processing module 2301 is also used to access a second network device according to access information corresponding to the first area when the identifier of at least one fourth area includes an identifier of the first area.
- the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: the processing module 2301 is used to receive second information from the second network device through the transceiver module 2302 according to the identifier of the first area, the second information indicating access information corresponding to the first area, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the first area to access the second network device; the processing module 2301 is also used to access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
- the communication device 230 When the communication device 230 is used to implement the function of the first network device:
- the processing module 2301 is used to obtain the first information, where the first information indicates information of a region, the region is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the region is determined by an identifier of the region; the transceiver module 2302 is used to send the first information to the terminal device.
- the communication device 230 may be presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner.
- the "module” here may refer to a specific application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and a memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, an integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 2302 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or the chip system, and the function/implementation process of the processing module 2301 can be implemented through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or the chip system.
- the communication device 230 provided in this embodiment can execute the above method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal device or network device described in the embodiment of the present application can also be implemented using the following: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), programmable logic devices (PLD), controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or devices capable of executing the present application. Any combination of circuits with various functions described in this article.
- FPGA field programmable gate arrays
- PLD programmable logic devices
- controllers state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or devices capable of executing the present application. Any combination of circuits with various functions described in this article.
- the terminal device or network device described in the embodiment of the present application can be implemented by a general bus architecture.
- Figure 24 is a structural diagram of a communication device 2400 provided in an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 2400 includes a processor 2401 and a transceiver 2402.
- the communication device 2400 can be a terminal device, or a chip or chip system therein; or, the communication device 2400 can be a network device, or a chip or chip system therein.
- Figure 24 only shows the main components of the communication device 2400.
- the communication device may further include a memory 2403, and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
- the processor 2401 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the memory 2403 is mainly used to store the software program and data.
- the transceiver 2402 may include a radio frequency circuit and an antenna.
- the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing radio frequency signals.
- the antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
- the processor 2401, the transceiver 2402, and the memory 2403 may be connected via a communication bus.
- the processor 2401 can read the software program in the memory 2403, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor 2401 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
- the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
- the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 2401.
- the processor 2401 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
- the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the processor performing baseband processing.
- the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged remotely from the communication device.
- the communication device 230 may take the form of a communication device 2400 as shown in FIG. 24 .
- the function/implementation process of the processing module 2301 in FIG23 can be implemented by the processor 2401 in the communication device 2400 shown in FIG24 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 2403.
- the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 2302 in FIG23 can be implemented by the transceiver 2402 in the communication device 2400 shown in FIG24.
- the terminal device or network device in the present application may adopt the composition structure shown in Figure 25, or include the components shown in Figure 25.
- Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 2500 provided by the present application, and the communication device 2500 may be a network device or a module or chip or system on chip in a network device; or the communication device 2500 may be a terminal device or a module or chip or system on chip in a terminal device.
- the communication device 2500 includes at least one processor 2501 and at least one communication interface (FIG. 25 is merely an example of a communication interface 2504 and a processor 2501).
- the communication device 2500 may also include a communication bus 2502 and a memory 2503.
- Processor 2501 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a network processor (NP), a digital signal processor (DSP), a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device (PLD), or any combination thereof.
- processor 2501 may also be other devices with processing functions, such as circuits, devices, or software modules, without limitation.
- the communication bus 2502 is used to connect different components in the communication device 2500 so that the different components can communicate.
- the communication bus 2502 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus.
- PCI peripheral component interconnect
- EISA extended industry standard architecture
- the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 25, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
- the communication interface 2504 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks.
- the communication interface 2504 can be a module, a circuit, a transceiver, or any device capable of implementing communication.
- the communication interface 2504 can also be an input and output interface located in the processor 2501 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
- the memory 2503 may be a device with a storage function, used to store instructions and/or data, wherein the instructions may be computer programs.
- the memory 2503 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or a random access memory (RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and/or instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device. Etc., no restrictions.
- the memory 2503 may exist independently of the processor 2501, or may be integrated with the processor 2501.
- the memory 2503 may be located inside the communication device 2500, or may be located outside the communication device 2500, without limitation.
- the processor 2501 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 2503 to implement the method provided in the following embodiments of the present application.
- the communication device 2500 may further include an output device 2505 and an input device 2506.
- the output device 2505 communicates with the processor 2501 and may display information in a variety of ways.
- the output device 2505 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector.
- the input device 2506 communicates with the processor 2501 and may receive user input in a variety of ways.
- the input device 2506 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
- the communication device 230 shown in FIG. 23 may take the form of the communication device 2500 shown in FIG. 25 .
- the function/implementation process of the processing module 2301 in FIG23 can be implemented by the processor 2501 in the communication device 2500 shown in FIG25 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 2503.
- the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 2302 in FIG23 can be implemented by the communication interface 2504 in the communication device 2500 shown in FIG25.
- the structure shown in FIG. 25 does not constitute a specific limitation on the network device.
- the network device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange the components differently.
- the components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
- an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing a method in any of the above method embodiments.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the memory is used to store necessary computer programs and data.
- the computer program may include instructions, and the processor may call the instructions in the computer program stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the above method embodiments.
- the memory may not be in the communication device.
- the communication device also includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, which is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in a memory, may be read directly from the memory, or may pass through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
- an interface circuit which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, which is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in a memory, may be read directly from the memory, or may pass through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device.
- the communication device can be a chip or a chip system.
- the communication device can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
- the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
- a computer program or instruction is stored on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
- the present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
- the systems, devices and methods described in the present application can also be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
- Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, i.e., they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed over multiple network units.
- the components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- all or part of the embodiments may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- all or part of the embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions may be stored in a computer program product.
- the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer instructions may be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated therein.
- the available medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state drive (SSD)), etc.
- the computer may include the device described above.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及通信方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to communication methods and devices.
非陆地网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN)具有全球覆盖、远距离传输、组网灵活、部署方便和不受地理条件限制等显著优点,已经被广泛应用于海上通信、定位导航、抗险救灾、科学实验、视频广播和对地观测等多个领域。NTN网络可以和地面网络融合,取长补短,共同构成全球无缝覆盖的海、陆、空、天、地一体化综合通信网,满足用户无处不在的多种业务需求。Non-terrestrial networks (NTN) have significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment and no geographical restrictions. They have been widely used in many fields such as maritime communications, positioning navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting and earth observation. NTN networks can be integrated with terrestrial networks to complement each other and form a global seamless integrated communication network covering sea, land, air, space and ground to meet the various business needs of users everywhere.
在地面网络中,通常基于信号质量进行小区切换或小区重选。但是,由于NTN中远近效应不明显,仅基于信号质量进行小区切换或小区重选的效率较低。因此,NTN中提出基于位置信息的移动性管理方法,如基于终端设备与源小区的参考点以及目标小区的参考点之间的距离,进行移动性管理。In terrestrial networks, cell switching or cell reselection is usually performed based on signal quality. However, since the near-far effect is not obvious in NTN, the efficiency of cell switching or cell reselection based only on signal quality is low. Therefore, NTN proposes a mobility management method based on location information, such as mobility management based on the distance between the terminal device and the reference point of the source cell and the reference point of the target cell.
然而,上述基于位置信息的移动性管理方法中,网络侧进行移动性相关配置(如小区的参考点)的信令开销较大。However, in the above-mentioned location information-based mobility management method, the signaling overhead of the network side performing mobility-related configuration (such as the reference point of the cell) is relatively large.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供通信方法及装置,能够降低信令开销。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device that can reduce signaling overhead.
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,也可以由终端设备的部件,例如终端设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:接收来自第一网络设备的第一信息,第一信息指示区域的信息,该区域相对地球固定,该区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的;根据终端设备的位置信息和第一信息确定第一区域的标识,第一区域为终端设备所处的区域;根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by a component of the terminal device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the terminal device, or by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device. The method includes: receiving first information from a first network device, the first information indicating information of a region, the region is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the region is determined by an identifier of the region; determining an identifier of the first region according to the location information of the terminal device and the first information, the first region being the region where the terminal device is located; and performing mobility management according to the identifier of the first region.
基于该方案,可以将地面离散为一些相对地球固定的区域,并且这些区域的地理位置可以通过区域的标识确定。因此,网络设备可以向终端设备指示区域的信息(如指示区域总数和/或区域的半径),使得终端设备能够基于区域的信息获知区域分布情况,从而根据终端设备的位置信息和区域分布情况确定终端设备所处的区域,并基于终端设备所处的区域进行移动性管理。相比于网络设备向终端设备直接配置参考点位置信息(如发送参考点的位置坐标等),以使终端设备进行移动性管理,可以降低信令开销。Based on this solution, the ground can be discretized into some fixed areas relative to the earth, and the geographical locations of these areas can be determined by the identification of the areas. Therefore, the network device can indicate the information of the area (such as indicating the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area) to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can obtain the distribution of the area based on the information of the area, thereby determining the area where the terminal device is located according to the location information of the terminal device and the distribution of the area, and performing mobility management based on the area where the terminal device is located. Compared with the network device directly configuring the reference point location information to the terminal device (such as sending the location coordinates of the reference point, etc.) to enable the terminal device to perform mobility management, the signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息指示区域总数Nspot和/或区域的半径Rspot。In a possible design, the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius R spot of an area.
基于该可能的设计,可以使得终端设备获知区域标识的总数,从而根据区域标识获知各个区域的地理位置,进而获知区域分布。Based on this possible design, the terminal device can learn the total number of area identifiers, thereby learning the geographical location of each area according to the area identifier, and further learning the regional distribution.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还指示以下至少一项:参考区域的标识、仰角信息、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息。其中,参考区域为第一小区中的一个区域,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区;仰角信息指示第一小区对应的最小仰角,或指示第一小区中的区域对应的最小仰角。In a possible design, the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference area, elevation information, ephemeris information of a first network device, or ephemeris information of a second network device. The reference area is an area in a first cell, and the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; the elevation information indicates a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or indicates a minimum elevation angle corresponding to an area in the first cell.
在一种可能的设计中,根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:根据第一区域的标识确定第一区域中的参考位置;根据第一区域中的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一仰角,确定第一小区的剩余服务时间;在第一小区的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。其中,第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角或第一区域对应的最小仰角。In a possible design, mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: determining a reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; determining the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the first area, ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle; before the remaining service time of the first cell ends, starting neighboring cell measurement. The first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
在一种可能的设计中,根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:根据参考区域的标识和区域总数确定参考区域中的参考位置;根据参考区域中的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一仰角,确定第一小区的剩余服务时间;在第一小区的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。其中,第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角或第一区域对应的最小仰角。第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区。In a possible design, mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: determining a reference position in the reference area according to the identifier of the reference area and the total number of areas; determining the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the reference area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle; before the remaining service time of the first cell ends, starting neighboring cell measurement. The first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area. The first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
基于上述两种可能的设计,由于终端设备在第一小区的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量,而第一小区是否被覆盖由网络设备的移动决定,因此,该设计可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。Based on the above two possible designs, since the terminal device starts neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first cell ends, and whether the first cell is covered is determined by the movement of the network device, this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
在一种可能的设计中,根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:根据第一区域的标识确定第一区域中的参考位置;在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。其中,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差,第一时延为第一区域中的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播 时延,第二时延为第一区域中的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。In a possible design, mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: determining a reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; and performing neighboring area measurement on the second network device within a first time window. The offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between the first delay and the second delay, and the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device. delay, and the second delay is a propagation delay between a reference location in the first area and the second network device.
基于该可能的设计,终端设备在第一时间窗内进行邻区测量,且第一时间窗的起始时刻与终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延相关,由于网络设备的移动,在不同时间网络设备可能位于不同位置,从而终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延随时间变化,因此,该设计可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。Based on this possible design, the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurements within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located at different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device varies with time. Therefore, this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还指示以下至少一项:区域图样、参考区域的标识或第一门限。其中,区域图样指示至少一个第二区域的标识,第二区域为被第一网络设备的波束服务的区域;参考区域为第一小区中的一个区域,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区。In a possible design, the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an area pattern, an identifier of a reference area, or a first threshold. The area pattern indicates an identifier of at least one second area, where the second area is an area served by a beam of the first network device; the reference area is an area in the first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
在一种可能的设计中,根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:在以下至少一项满足的情况下,进行邻区测量:至少一个第二区域的标识中不包括第一区域的标识;或者,第一区域中的参考位置与第三区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限,第一区域中的参考位置是根据第一区域的标识确定的,第三区域为至少一个第二区域中的边缘区域;或者,第一区域中的参考位置与参考区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限;或者,第一区域的标识与参考区域的标识之差大于或等于第一门限;终端设备的位置与第三区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于所述第一门限;或者,终端设备的位置与参考区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于所述第一门限。In one possible design, mobility management is performed according to the identifier of the first area, including: performing neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the identifier of at least one second area does not include the identifier of the first area; or, the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identifier of the first area, and the third area is an edge area of at least one second area; or, the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the difference between the identifier of the first area and the identifier of the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold.
基于该可能的设计,触发邻区测量的条件与终端设备的位置相关,在终端设备处于不同位置时,上述条件的满足情况可能不同。因此,该方案可以适用于终端设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。Based on this possible design, the condition for triggering neighbor cell measurement is related to the location of the terminal device, and when the terminal device is in different locations, the above conditions may be satisfied differently. Therefore, this solution can be applied to the scenario where the movement of the terminal device triggers cell reselection.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还指示至少一个第四区域的标识和至少一个第四区域分别对应的接入信息,第四区域为Nspot个区域中能够被第一网络设备覆盖的区域,接入信息用于第四区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, the first information also indicates the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding to at least one fourth area, the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be covered by the first network device, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the fourth area to access the second network device.
在一种可能的设计中,接入信息包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备的标识、目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码;目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。In one possible design, the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble code; the target beam is a beam of the second network device.
基于上述两种可能的设计,第一网络设备可以向终端设备指示第四区域的标识及其对应的接入信息,使得第四区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入其他网络设备。此外,第一网络设备可以为不同的第四区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第四区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入其他网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on the above two possible designs, the first network device can indicate the identifier of the fourth area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device in the fourth area can access other network devices according to the access information. In addition, the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different fourth areas, so that terminal devices in different fourth areas can access other network devices on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving access success rate.
在一种可能的设计中,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息位于媒体接入控制MAC协议数据单元PDU的子头中;或者,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC控制元素CE中;或者,第四区域的标识位于MAC PDU的子头中,第四区域对应的接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中。In one possible design, the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a subheader of a media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region is located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, and the access information corresponding to the fourth region is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
在一种可能的设计中,根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:确定至少一个第四区域的标识中是否包括第一区域的标识;若至少一个第四区域的标识包括第一区域的标识,根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, mobility management is performed based on the identifier of the first area, including: determining whether the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area; if the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area, accessing the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
在一种可能的设计中,区域的总数为第二网络设备生效的区域总数,和/或,区域的半径为第二网络设备生效的区域半径。In one possible design, the total number of areas is the total number of areas where the second network device is effective, and/or the radius of the area is the radius of the area where the second network device is effective.
在一种可能的设计中,根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:根据第一区域的标识,接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息,第二信息指示第一区域对应的接入信息,接入信息用于第一区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备;根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, mobility management is performed based on an identifier of the first area, including: receiving second information from a second network device based on the identifier of the first area, the second information indicating access information corresponding to the first area, the access information being used for terminal devices in the first area to access the second network device; and accessing the second network device based on the access information corresponding to the first area.
基于该可能的设计,第二网络设备可以指示各个区域对应的接入信息,使得区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入第二网络设备。此外,第二网络设备可以为不同的区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第二网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on this possible design, the second network device can indicate the access information corresponding to each area, so that the terminal device in the area can access the second network device according to the access information. In addition, the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different areas, so that the terminal devices in different areas can access the second network device on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第一网络设备执行,也可以由第一网络设备的部件,例如第一网络设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分第一网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:获取第一信息,第一信息指示区域的信息,区域相对地球固定,区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的;向终端设备发送第一信息。其中,第二方面所带来的技术效果可参考上述第一方面所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。In the second aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first network device, or by a component of the first network device, such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system of the first network device, or by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first network device. The method includes: obtaining first information, the first information indicating information of a region, the region is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the region is determined by an identifier of the region; sending the first information to a terminal device. Among them, the technical effects brought about by the second aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the above-mentioned first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息指示区域总数Nspot和/或区域的半径Rspot。In a possible design, the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius R spot of an area.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还指示以下至少一项:参考区域的标识、仰角信息、第一网络设备的 星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息。其中,参考区域为第一小区中的一个区域,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区;仰角信息指示第一小区对应的最小仰角,或指示第一小区中的区域对应的最小仰角。In one possible design, the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an identifier of the reference area, elevation information, The ephemeris information or the ephemeris information of the second network device. The reference area is an area in the first cell, and the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; the elevation angle information indicates the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or indicates the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the area in the first cell.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还指示以下至少一项:区域图样、参考区域的标识或第一门限。其中,区域图样指示至少一个第二区域的标识,第二区域为被第一网络设备的波束服务的区域;参考区域为第一小区中的一个区域,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区。In a possible design, the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an area pattern, an identifier of a reference area, or a first threshold. The area pattern indicates an identifier of at least one second area, where the second area is an area served by a beam of the first network device; the reference area is an area in the first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
在一种可能的设计中,第一信息还指示至少一个第四区域的标识和至少一个第四区域分别对应的接入信息,第四区域为Nspot个区域中能够被第一网络设备覆盖的区域,接入信息用于第四区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, the first information also indicates the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding to at least one fourth area, the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be covered by the first network device, and the access information is used for terminal devices in the fourth area to access the second network device.
在一种可能的设计中,接入信息包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备的标识、目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码;目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。In one possible design, the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble code; the target beam is a beam of the second network device.
在一种可能的设计中,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息位于媒体接入控制MAC协议数据单元PDU的子头中;或者,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC控制元素CE中;或者,第四区域的标识位于MAC PDU的子头中,第四区域对应的接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中。In one possible design, the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a subheader of a media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region and the access information corresponding to the fourth region are located in a MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth region is located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, and the access information corresponding to the fourth region is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
在一种可能的设计中,区域的总数为第二网络设备生效的区域总数,和/或,区域的半径为第二网络设备生效的区域半径。In one possible design, the total number of areas is the total number of areas where the second network device is effective, and/or the radius of the area is the radius of the area where the second network device is effective.
其中,第二方面任一种可能的设计所带来的技术效果可参考上述第一方面中的相应设计所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought about by any possible design of the second aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the corresponding design in the above-mentioned first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,区域的地理位置还根据以下至少一项确定:区域的半径、地球半径、区域总数。In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the geographical location of the region is also determined based on at least one of the following: the radius of the region, the radius of the earth, and the total number of regions.
基于该可能的设计,区域总数、区域的半径以及地球半径对每个区域来说可以是相同的,即可以认为区域总数、区域的半径以及地球半径是常量。此时,可以认为影响区域的地理位置的变量即为区域的标识。Based on this possible design, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be the same for each region, that is, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be considered constants. At this time, the variable that affects the geographical location of the region can be considered to be the identifier of the region.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,区域中包括参考位置,参考位置的三维坐标和区域的标识满足如下关系:
In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
其中,i表示区域的标识,RL(i)表示参考位置的三维坐标,Re表示地球半径,[x]表示x的小数部分,Nspot表示区域总数。Among them, i represents the identifier of the area, RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position, Re represents the radius of the earth, [x] represents the decimal part of x, and N spot represents the total number of areas.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,参考位置在单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(xi)=(1-cosθi)/2
In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the projection RL(x i ,y i ) of the reference position on the unit square and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi ) = (1 - cosθi ) / 2
其中,单位正方形指笛卡尔平面中顶点位于(0,0)、(1,0)、(0,1)和(1,1)的正方形,RL(xi)表示参考位置在单位正方形的x轴上的投影度量,RL(yi)表示参考位置在单位正方形的y轴上的投影度量。Wherein, the unit square refers to the square in the Cartesian plane with vertices at (0,0), (1,0), (0,1) and (1,1), RL( xi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position on the x-axis of the unit square, and RL( yi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position on the y-axis of the unit square.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,参考位置的笛卡尔坐标RL(xi,yi)和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(xi)=i/Nspot
In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the Cartesian coordinates RL (x i , y i ) of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi )=i/ Nspot
其中,RL(xi)表示参考位置在笛卡尔坐标系的x轴方向的投影度量,RL(yi)表示参考位置在笛卡尔坐标系的y轴方向的投影度量。Wherein, RL( xi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the x-axis direction of the Cartesian coordinate system, and RL( yi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the y-axis direction of the Cartesian coordinate system.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,区域中包括参考位置,参考位置的三维坐标和区域的标识满足如下关系:
In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
其中,i表示区域的标识,RL(i)表示参考位置的三维坐标,Re表示地球半径,Nspot表示区域总数。Among them, i represents the identification of the area, RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position, Re represents the radius of the earth, and N spot represents the total number of areas.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,区域中包括参考位置,参考位置的经纬度坐标和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i))
In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the region includes a reference position, and the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i))
其中,lon(i)表示参考位置的经度,lat(i)表示参考位置的纬度,Nspot表示区域总数。Wherein, lon(i) represents the longitude of the reference location, lat(i) represents the latitude of the reference location, and N spot represents the total number of areas.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,区域的半径和区域总数满足如下关系:
In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the radius of the area and the total number of areas satisfy the following relationship:
其中,Re表示地球半径,Nspot表示区域总数,Rspot表示区域的半径。Among them, Re represents the radius of the earth, N spot represents the total number of areas, and R spot represents the radius of the area.
基于上述几种可能的设计,一方面,可以根据区域的标识快速、准确地确定区域中参考位置的坐标,从而可以快速、准确地确定区域的轮廓、地理位置等。另一方面,可以灵活调整区域的半径,以适配不同载荷能力,例如适配不同波束半径。再一方面,由于区域的地理位置可以通过区域的标识确定,因此,网络设备和终端设备之间可以基于区域的标识进行信息交互。相比于直接发送参考点位置信息以进行移动性管理,可以显著降低信令开销;相比于基于H3地理网格进行划分的方式,由于区域总数相对较少,因此指示区域标识所需的比特数也较少,从而也可以降低信令开销。Based on the above possible designs, on the one hand, the coordinates of the reference position in the area can be quickly and accurately determined according to the identification of the area, so that the outline, geographical location, etc. of the area can be quickly and accurately determined. On the other hand, the radius of the area can be flexibly adjusted to adapt to different load capacities, such as adapting to different beam radii. On the other hand, since the geographical location of the area can be determined by the identification of the area, information exchange can be carried out between network devices and terminal devices based on the identification of the area. Compared with directly sending reference point location information for mobility management, the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced; compared with the division method based on the H3 geographic grid, since the total number of areas is relatively small, the number of bits required to indicate the area identification is also small, which can also reduce the signaling overhead.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置用于实现各种方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的终端设备,或者终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第一网络设备,或者第二网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided for implementing various methods. The communication device may be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or, the communication device may be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system. The communication device includes a module, unit, or means corresponding to the implementation method, and the module, unit, or means may be implemented by hardware, software, or by hardware executing the corresponding software implementation. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用以实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的接收功能和发送功能。In some possible designs, the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. The processing module may be used to implement the processing function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof. The transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module, respectively used to implement the receiving function and the sending function in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
在一些可能的设计中,收发模块可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In some possible designs, the transceiver module may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的终端设备,或者终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第一网络设备,或者第二网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any aspect. The communication device can be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or the communication device can be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
第五方面,提供一种通信装置,包括:处理器和通信接口;该通信接口,用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信;所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的终端设备,或者终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第一网络设备,或者第二网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction so that the communication device executes the method described in any aspect. The communication device can be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or the communication device can be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:至少一个处理器;所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该存储器可以与处理器耦合,或者,也可以独立于该处理器。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的终端设备,或者终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第一网络设备,或者第二网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: at least one processor; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction stored in a memory so that the communication device performs the method described in any aspect. The memory may be coupled to the processor, or may be independent of the processor. The communication device may be the terminal device in the first aspect, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or the communication device may be the first network device in the second aspect, or a device included in the second network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得通信装置可以执行第一方面及其任意一种可能的设计所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, in which a computer program or instruction is stored. When the computer-readable storage medium is run on a communication device, the communication device can execute the method described in the first aspect and any possible design thereof.
第八方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得该通信装置可以 执行任一方面及其任意一种可能的设计所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, there is provided a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a communication device, enables the communication device to Perform the method described in any aspect and any possible design thereof.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置(例如,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统),该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现任一方面及其任意一种可能的设计中所涉及的功能。In a ninth aspect, a communication device (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system) is provided, wherein the communication device includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in any aspect and any possible design thereof.
在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置包括存储器,该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据。In some possible designs, the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
在一些可能的设计中,该装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In some possible designs, when the device is a chip system, it can be composed of a chip or include a chip and other discrete devices.
可以理解的是,第三方面至第九方面中任一方面提供的通信装置是芯片时,通信装置的发送动作/功能可以理解为输出信息,通信装置的接收动作/功能可以理解为输入信息。It can be understood that when the communication device provided in any one of the third aspect to the ninth aspect is a chip, the sending action/function of the communication device can be understood as output information, and the receiving action/function of the communication device can be understood as input information.
其中,第三方面至第九方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面或第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought about by any design method in the third to ninth aspects can refer to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the first or second aspects, and will not be repeated here.
图1为本申请提供的一种NTN中的非凝视模式和凝视模式下的波束覆盖范围示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of beam coverage in a non-staring mode and a staring mode in an NTN provided by the present application;
图2为本申请提供的一种波束在地面的投影示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a projection of a beam on the ground provided by the present application;
图3为本申请提供的一种基于H3地理网格的区域描述方式示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a regional description method based on an H3 geographic grid provided by the present application;
图4为本申请提供的一种群切换的场景示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a group switching scenario provided by the present application;
图5为本申请提供的一种小区切换的流程示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a cell switching process provided by the present application;
图6为本申请提供的一种透传模式下的卫星网络架构图;FIG6 is a satellite network architecture diagram in a transparent transmission mode provided by the present application;
图7为本申请提供的一种再生模式下的卫星网络架构图;FIG7 is a satellite network architecture diagram in a regeneration mode provided by the present application;
图8为本申请提供的另一种再生模式下的卫星网络架构图;FIG8 is a diagram of a satellite network architecture in another regeneration mode provided by the present application;
图9为本申请提供的又一种再生模式下的卫星网络架构图;FIG9 is a diagram of a satellite network architecture in another regeneration mode provided by the present application;
图10为本申请提供的一种NTN和陆地网络融合的网络架构图;FIG10 is a network architecture diagram of NTN and terrestrial network integration provided by the present application;
图11为本申请提供的一种网络设备的波束和区域的映射关系示意图;FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a mapping relationship between beams and regions of a network device provided by the present application;
图12为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG12 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;
图13为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG13 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;
图14为本申请提供的一种仰角的示意图;FIG14 is a schematic diagram of an elevation angle provided by the present application;
图15为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG15 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;
图16为本申请提供的一种传播时延示意图;FIG16 is a schematic diagram of a propagation delay provided by the present application;
图17为本申请提供的一种终端设备移动的示意图;FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device movement provided by the present application;
图18为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG18 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;
图19为本申请提供的一种终端切换的场景示意图;FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a terminal switching scenario provided by the present application;
图20为本申请提供的一种MAC PDU的结构示意图;Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a MAC PDU provided by this application;
图21为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG21 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;
图22为本申请提供的一种切换流程示意图;FIG22 is a schematic diagram of a switching process provided by the present application;
图23为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG23 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by the present application;
图24为本申请提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG24 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided by the present application;
图25为本申请提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG25 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided in the present application.
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" indicates that the objects associated with each other are in an "or" relationship, for example, A/B can represent A or B; "and/or" in this application is merely a description of the association relationship between associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist, for example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。In addition, in order to clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and execution order, and words such as "first" and "second" do not necessarily limit the difference.
在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被 描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。In the embodiments of the present application, the words "exemplary" or "for example" are used to indicate examples, illustrations or descriptions. Any embodiment or design described as "exemplary" or "for example" should not be interpreted as being more preferred or advantageous than other embodiments or designs. Specifically, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "for example" is intended to present the relevant concepts in a specific manner for ease of understanding.
可以理解,说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各个实施例未必指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。可以理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It is understood that the "embodiment" mentioned throughout the specification means that the specific features, structures or characteristics related to the embodiment are included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the various embodiments in the entire specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. In addition, these specific features, structures or characteristics can be combined in one or more embodiments in any suitable manner. It is understood that in various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application.
可以理解,在本申请中,“…时”以及“若”均指在某种客观情况下会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求实现时要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。It can be understood that in the present application, "when" and "if" both mean that corresponding processing will be carried out under certain objective circumstances, and do not limit the time, nor do they require any judgment action when implementing, nor do they mean the existence of other limitations.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征,在某些场景下,可以不依赖于其他特征,比如其当前所基于的方案,而独立实施,解决相应的技术问题,达到相应的效果,也可以在某些场景下,依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的,本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能,在此不予赘述。It can be understood that some optional features in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented independently in certain scenarios without relying on other features, such as the solution on which they are currently based, to solve corresponding technical problems and achieve corresponding effects, or may be combined with other features according to needs in certain scenarios. Accordingly, the devices provided in the embodiments of the present application may also realize these features or functions accordingly, which will not be elaborated here.
本申请中,除特殊说明外,各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例、实施方式、实施方法、或实现方法。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between the various embodiments can refer to each other. In the various embodiments in this application, and the various implementation methods/implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment, if there is no special explanation and logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments and the various implementation methods/implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment are consistent and can be referenced to each other. The technical features in different embodiments and the various implementation methods/implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment can be combined to form new embodiments, implementation methods, implementation methods, or implementation methods according to their inherent logical relationships. The implementation methods of this application described below do not constitute a limitation on the scope of protection of this application.
为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案,首先给出本申请相关技术的简要介绍如下。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, a brief introduction to the related technologies of the present application is first given as follows.
1、非陆地网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN):1. Non-terrestrial networks (NTN):
目前,第五代(5th generation,5G)新空口(new radio,NR)已经从标准化阶段进入到商业部署阶段。NR标准主要针对陆地通信特点进行研究设计,陆地通信能够为用户终端提供高速率、高可靠、低时延通信等。At present, the fifth generation (5G) new radio (NR) has entered the commercial deployment stage from the standardization stage. The NR standard is mainly designed for the characteristics of terrestrial communications, which can provide user terminals with high-speed, high-reliability, and low-latency communications.
相比于陆地通信,NTN通信具有全球覆盖、远距离传输、组网灵活、部署方便和不受地理条件限制等显著优点,已经被广泛应用于海上通信、定位导航、抗险救灾、科学实验、视频广播和对地观测等多个领域。NTN网络可以和地面网络融合,取长补短,共同构成全球无缝覆盖的海、陆、空、天、地一体化综合通信网,满足用户无处不在的多种业务需求。Compared with terrestrial communications, NTN communications have significant advantages such as global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, convenient deployment and no geographical restrictions. They have been widely used in maritime communications, positioning navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting and earth observation. NTN networks can be integrated with terrestrial networks to complement each other and form a global seamless integrated communication network covering sea, land, air, space and ground to meet the various business needs of users everywhere.
按照飞行平台距离地面的高度,NTN可以包括低空平台(low altitude platform,LAP)子网(LAP subnetwork)、高空平台(high altitude platform,HAP)子网(HAP subnetwork)、以及卫星通信子网(SATCOM subnetwork)。According to the height of the flight platform from the ground, NTN can include a low altitude platform (LAP) subnetwork, a high altitude platform (HAP) subnetwork, and a satellite communication subnetwork (SATCOM subnetwork).
示例性的,LAP subnetwork中,基站或基站功能部署于距离地面0.1km至1km的低空飞行平台(例如无人机)上为终端提供覆盖;HAP subnetwork中,基站或基站功能部署于距离地面8km至50km的高空飞行平台(例如飞机)上为终端提供覆盖;SATCOM subnetwork中,基站或基站功能部署于距离地面50km以上的卫星上为终端提供覆盖。For example, in the LAP subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on low-altitude flying platforms (such as drones) 0.1km to 1km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; in the HAP subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on high-altitude flying platforms (such as airplanes) 8km to 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals; in the SATCOM subnetwork, base stations or base station functions are deployed on satellites more than 50km above the ground to provide coverage for terminals.
进一步的,按照卫星的轨道高度,可以将卫星通信系统分为地球静止轨道(geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星通信系统、中地球轨道(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星通信系统和低地球轨道(low-earth orbit,LEO)卫星通信系统。Furthermore, according to the orbital altitude of the satellite, the satellite communication system can be divided into geostationary earth orbit (GEO) satellite communication system, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite communication system and low-earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication system.
GEO卫星通信系统又称同步轨道卫星系统。GEO卫星的轨道高度为35786km,其运动速度与地球自转速度相同,即GEO卫星可以保持相对地面静止。GEO卫星通信系统能够提供较大的小区覆盖,一般情况下小区的直径为500km。然而,GEO卫星通信也具有明显的缺点:1)GEO卫星轨道距离地球较远,自由空间传播损耗大,导致通信链路预算紧张,为了增大发射/接收增益需要为卫星配备较大口径的天线;2)通信传输时延大,例如存在500毫秒左右的往返时延,无法满足实时业务的需求;3)GEO轨道资源相对紧张、发射成本高且无法为地球两极地区提供覆盖。The GEO satellite communication system is also known as the synchronous orbit satellite system. The orbital altitude of the GEO satellite is 35786km, and its movement speed is the same as the rotation speed of the earth, that is, the GEO satellite can remain stationary relative to the ground. The GEO satellite communication system can provide large cell coverage, and the diameter of the cell is generally 500km. However, GEO satellite communication also has obvious disadvantages: 1) The GEO satellite orbit is far away from the earth, and the free space propagation loss is large, resulting in a tight communication link budget. In order to increase the transmission/reception gain, the satellite needs to be equipped with a larger diameter antenna; 2) The communication transmission delay is large, for example, there is a round-trip delay of about 500 milliseconds, which cannot meet the needs of real-time services; 3) GEO orbit resources are relatively tight, the launch cost is high, and it cannot provide coverage for the earth's polar regions.
MEO卫星的轨道高度位于2000~35786km之间,可以通过相对较少的卫星数目实现全球覆盖。但是MEO卫星的轨道高度高于LEO卫星的轨道高度,传输时延相比LEO卫星通信仍然较大。因此,综合考虑MEO卫星通信的优缺点,MEO卫星主要应用于定位与导航。The orbital altitude of MEO satellites is between 2000 and 35786 km, and global coverage can be achieved with a relatively small number of satellites. However, the orbital altitude of MEO satellites is higher than that of LEO satellites, and the transmission delay is still larger than that of LEO satellite communications. Therefore, considering the advantages and disadvantages of MEO satellite communications, MEO satellites are mainly used for positioning and navigation.
LEO卫星的轨道高度位于300~2000km之间,其轨道高度小于MEO卫星的轨道高度。具有传输时延小、传输损耗小、发射成本相对较低等优点。 The orbital altitude of LEO satellites is between 300 and 2000 km, which is lower than that of MEO satellites. It has the advantages of small transmission delay, small transmission loss and relatively low launch cost.
下一代卫星通信系统总体呈现超密、异构的趋势。首先,卫星的规模从铱星星座的66颗发展到一网星座的720颗,并最终延展到12000+的星链(Starlink)超密LEO卫星星座;其次,卫星网络呈现异构特性,从传统的单层通信网络发展到多层通信网络,通信卫星网络的功能也趋向复杂化、多样化,逐渐兼容并支持导航增强、对地观测、多维信息在轨处理等功能。The next generation of satellite communication systems generally presents a trend of ultra-dense and heterogeneous. First, the scale of satellites has grown from 66 in the Iridium constellation to 720 in the OneNet constellation, and eventually extended to the 12,000+ Starlink ultra-dense LEO satellite constellation; second, the satellite network presents heterogeneous characteristics, from the traditional single-layer communication network to the multi-layer communication network, the functions of the communication satellite network also tend to be complex and diversified, and gradually compatible with and support functions such as navigation enhancement, earth observation, and multi-dimensional information on-orbit processing.
2、非凝视模式(earth-moving)和凝视(earth-fixed或quasi-earth fixed)模式:2. Non-gazing mode (earth-moving) and gazing (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed) mode:
在卫星通信系统中,根据波束的工作模式,通常可以分为非凝视模式和凝视模式。如图1中的(a)所示,在非凝视模式下,一段时间内(如时刻t0至时刻t2之间),卫星波束的覆盖范围随着卫星一起移动。如图1中的(b)所示,在凝视模式下,一段时间内(如时刻t0至时刻t2之间),卫星通过动态调整波束指向,使得波束近似覆盖地面同一区域。但是在实际应用中,由于波束指向的精度问题以及不同入射角度波束投影在地面的畸变问题,凝视模式下,波束的覆盖区域随着时间的变化仍然存在一定程度的抖动。In satellite communication systems, according to the working mode of the beam, it can usually be divided into non-staring mode and staring mode. As shown in (a) of Figure 1, in the non-staring mode, the coverage of the satellite beam moves with the satellite for a period of time (such as between time t0 and time t2). As shown in (b) of Figure 1, in the staring mode, for a period of time (such as between time t0 and time t2), the satellite dynamically adjusts the beam pointing so that the beam approximately covers the same area on the ground. However, in actual applications, due to the accuracy of beam pointing and the distortion of beam projection on the ground at different incident angles, in the staring mode, the coverage area of the beam still has a certain degree of jitter as time changes.
示例性的,波束在协议中的体现可以是空域滤波器(spatial domain filter),或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter),或称空域参数(spatial domain parameter),空间参数(spatial parameter),空域设置(spatial domain setting),空间设置(spatial setting),或准共址(Quasi-colocation,QCL)信息,QCL假设,QCL指示等。波束可以通过传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication,TCI)状态(TCI-state)参数来指示,或通过空间关系(spatial relation)参数来指示。因此,本申请中,波束可以替换为空域滤波器,空间滤波器,空域参数,空间参数,空域设置,空间设置,QCL信息,QCL假设,QCL指示,TCI-state,空间关系等。上述术语之间也相互等效。本申请中的波束也可以替换为其他表示波束的术语,本申请不作限定。Exemplarily, the embodiment of the beam in the protocol can be a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter, or a spatial domain parameter, a spatial parameter, a spatial domain setting, a spatial setting, or quasi-colocation (QCL) information, a QCL assumption, a QCL indication, etc. The beam can be indicated by a transmission configuration indication (TCI) state (TCI-state) parameter, or by a spatial relation (spatial relation) parameter. Therefore, in this application, the beam can be replaced by a spatial filter, a spatial filter, a spatial parameter, a spatial parameter, a spatial setting, a spatial setting, QCL information, a QCL assumption, a QCL indication, TCI-state, a spatial relationship, etc. The above terms are also equivalent to each other. The beam in this application can also be replaced by other terms representing the beam, and this application is not limited.
3、NTN的服务区域描述:3. Description of NTN’s service area:
作为第一种可能的实现,可以基于天线方向图,如给定的天线模型,计算地面不同区域的天线增益或接收功率等对应的轮廓(可以理解为波束在地面的投影),来表征卫星/小区的服务区域。该轮廓也可以理解为波位。As a first possible implementation, the service area of the satellite/cell can be characterized by calculating the corresponding contours of antenna gain or received power in different areas on the ground (which can be understood as the projection of the beam on the ground) based on the antenna pattern, such as a given antenna model. The contour can also be understood as the beam position.
示例性的,如图2中的(a)所示,示出了单颗GEO卫星72波束参考系统的天线增益图样。其中,椭圆形表示波束在地面的投影,或者说表示波位。如图2中的(b)所示,为非凝视模式下LEO卫星的波束在经纬度平面的轮廓。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG2 , the antenna gain pattern of the beam reference system of a single GEO satellite 72 is shown. The ellipse represents the projection of the beam on the ground, or the beam position. As shown in (b) of FIG2 , the profile of the beam of the LEO satellite in the latitude and longitude plane in the non-staring mode is shown.
在第一种可能的实现中,由于将波束在地面的投影理解为波位,因此可以认为波位与波束静态绑定。从而该方案通常用于GEO卫星网络或非凝视模式下的卫星网络。但是,在凝视模式下,卫星和地面某一区域的倾角动态变化,波束投影也随之改变,波位与波束静态绑定的方案可能不再适用。此外,由于将波束在地面的投影作为波位,因此通常需要波束参考点、波束覆盖区域轮廓、卫星运动向量等参数才能确定波位的具体位置,需要较大的信令开销。In the first possible implementation, since the projection of the beam on the ground is understood as the wave position, the wave position can be considered to be statically bound to the beam. Therefore, this solution is usually used in GEO satellite networks or satellite networks in non-staring mode. However, in the staring mode, the inclination angle between the satellite and a certain area of the ground changes dynamically, and the beam projection also changes accordingly. The solution of statically binding the wave position to the beam may no longer be applicable. In addition, since the projection of the beam on the ground is regarded as the wave position, parameters such as the beam reference point, the outline of the beam coverage area, and the satellite motion vector are usually required to determine the specific location of the wave position, which requires a large signaling overhead.
作为第二种可能的实现,可以基于H3地理网格将地球表面划分为正五边形或正六边形网格,使用该网格表示卫星/小区的服务区域,例如卫星/小区的服务区域可以包括一个或多个网格。其中,每个网格可以理解为一个波位。示例性的,基于H3地理网格进行划分时,将地球当作二十面体,该二十面体的每一个面都是球面三角形,具有12个顶点,称为球形二十面体(spherical icosahedron)。该球形二十面体的每个面上都有相同排列方式的六边形。As a second possible implementation, the surface of the earth can be divided into regular pentagonal or regular hexagonal grids based on the H3 geographic grid, and the grid is used to represent the service area of the satellite/cell. For example, the service area of the satellite/cell may include one or more grids. Each grid can be understood as a wave position. Exemplarily, when the division is performed based on the H3 geographic grid, the earth is regarded as an icosahedron, each face of which is a spherical triangle with 12 vertices, which is called a spherical icosahedron. Each face of the spherical icosahedron has hexagons arranged in the same manner.
该第二种可能的实现支持波位的层次化编址。示例性的,如图3所示,存在小、中、大三种面积的正六边形,其中面积最小的正六边形表示波位,其余两种面积的正六边形可以用于波位的层次化编址。为了方便描述,下述实施例将面积最大和面积第二大的正六边形分别称为第一正六边形和第二正六边形。This second possible implementation supports hierarchical addressing of wave positions. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG3 , there are three types of regular hexagons of small, medium, and large areas, wherein the regular hexagon with the smallest area represents the wave position, and the regular hexagons of the remaining two areas can be used for hierarchical addressing of the wave position. For the convenience of description, the following embodiments refer to the regular hexagons with the largest area and the second largest area as the first regular hexagon and the second regular hexagon, respectively.
基于图3所示的示例,在进行波位的层次化编址时,第一正六边形的索引可以理解为波位的第一层索引,第二正六边形的索引可以理解为波位的第二层索引,面积最小的正六边形的索引可以理解为波位的第三层索引。在索引某个波位时,可以先根据第一层索引确定波位所属的第一正六边形,然后根据第二层索引确定该第一正六边形中波位所属的第二正六边形,最后根据第三层索引确定该第二正六边形中的波位。Based on the example shown in FIG3, when performing hierarchical addressing of wave positions, the index of the first regular hexagon can be understood as the first-level index of the wave position, the index of the second regular hexagon can be understood as the second-level index of the wave position, and the index of the regular hexagon with the smallest area can be understood as the third-level index of the wave position. When indexing a wave position, the first regular hexagon to which the wave position belongs can be first determined according to the first-level index, and then the second regular hexagon to which the wave position in the first regular hexagon belongs can be determined according to the second-level index, and finally the wave position in the second regular hexagon can be determined according to the third-level index.
在第二种可能的实现中,目前仅支持16种不同精度的波位半径,难以适配不同的载荷能力(如波束半径)。例如,在波位半径的精度为整数,波束半径不是整数的情况下,可能无法准确地使用波位表示卫星/小区的服务区域。此外,该方案中基于波位的索引值确定波位的具体地理位置时,通常需要通过迭代循环的方式确定,无法快速计算波位的准确位置,并且,波位的索引值通常通过64比特指示,信令开销也较大。In the second possible implementation, only 16 different precisions of the wave position radius are currently supported, which makes it difficult to adapt to different load capacities (such as beam radius). For example, when the precision of the wave position radius is an integer and the beam radius is not an integer, the wave position may not be accurately used to represent the service area of the satellite/cell. In addition, when determining the specific geographical location of the wave position based on the index value of the wave position in this scheme, it is usually necessary to determine it through an iterative loop, and the exact location of the wave position cannot be quickly calculated. Moreover, the index value of the wave position is usually indicated by 64 bits, and the signaling overhead is also large.
4、群切换、群重选:4. Group switching and group reselection:
卫星的运动会导致某个区域内的连接态终端设备发生群切换,或者使得该区域内的空闲态终端设备发生群重选。 The movement of the satellite may cause group switching of connected terminal devices in a certain area, or group reselection of idle terminal devices in the area.
以群切换为例,如图4所示,假设区域2的子区域1内存在UE簇(记为UE-G1,其中包括多个UE),在时间T1,该子区域1被卫星2的一个或多个波束服务;在时间T2,卫星2的运动导致卫星2不能继续服务该子区域1,而是由卫星1的一个或多个波束接替卫星2服务子区域1。在该过程中,由于覆盖子区域1的卫星发生变化,因此UE-G1中的多个UE发生群切换,由卫星2切换至卫星1。Taking group handover as an example, as shown in FIG4 , it is assumed that there is a UE cluster (referred to as UE-G1, which includes multiple UEs) in sub-area 1 of area 2. At time T1, the sub-area 1 is served by one or more beams of satellite 2. At time T2, the movement of satellite 2 causes satellite 2 to be unable to continue to serve sub-area 1, and one or more beams of satellite 1 take over satellite 2 to serve sub-area 1. In this process, since the satellite covering sub-area 1 changes, multiple UEs in UE-G1 undergo group handover, switching from satellite 2 to satellite 1.
由于卫星的运动速度较快,例如LEO卫星的运动速度约为7.5km/s,因此发生群切换的频次较高,约为几秒到几十秒一次。Since the satellite moves at a relatively high speed, for example, the speed of a LEO satellite is about 7.5 km/s, the frequency of group switching is relatively high, about once every several seconds to several tens of seconds.
5、移动性管理:5. Mobility Management:
移动性管理主要包括小区切换、小区重选、注册更新和跟踪区更新等。以小区切换为例,如图5所示,NR系统中的小区切换流程主要包括如下步骤:Mobility management mainly includes cell switching, cell reselection, registration update and tracking area update. Taking cell switching as an example, as shown in Figure 5, the cell switching process in the NR system mainly includes the following steps:
1)小区切换测量:源基站(如下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNodeB或gNB))可以向终端设备发送多个小区(包括服务小区和邻区)的测量配置。终端设备根据测量配置对小区信号质量进行测量。示例性的,小区信号质量可以通过参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)和/或参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)表示。1) Cell handover measurement: The source base station (such as the next generation node B (gNodeB or gNB)) can send measurement configurations of multiple cells (including serving cells and neighboring cells) to the terminal device. The terminal device measures the cell signal quality according to the measurement configuration. Exemplarily, the cell signal quality can be represented by reference signal receiving power (RSRP) and/or reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ).
2)测量结果上报:终端设备向源基站上报测量结果。示例性的,终端设备可以周期性上报或基于事件的触发上报。示例性的,上报触发事件可以为服务小区的信号质量小于门限1,和/或邻区信号质量大于门限2。2) Measurement result reporting: The terminal device reports the measurement result to the source base station. For example, the terminal device can report periodically or based on event triggering. For example, the reporting triggering event can be that the signal quality of the serving cell is less than threshold 1, and/or the signal quality of the neighboring cell is greater than threshold 2.
3)切换判决:源基站根据测量结果选择合适的邻区作为目标小区,并向目标基站发送切换请求,其中携带用户切换相关的上下文信息。3) Handover decision: The source base station selects a suitable neighboring cell as the target cell based on the measurement results, and sends a handover request to the target base station, which carries context information related to the user handover.
4)准入控制:目标基站收到切换请求后,进行准入控制。在允许终端设备接入的情况下,向源基站发送切换请求确认消息,其中携带用于终端设备接入目标小区的相关信息。源基站收到切换请求确认消息后,向终端设备发送无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)重配置消息,其中携带用于接入目标小区的相关信息。4) Admission control: After receiving the handover request, the target base station performs admission control. If the terminal device is allowed to access, it sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station, which carries relevant information for the terminal device to access the target cell. After receiving the handover request confirmation message, the source base station sends a radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which carries relevant information for accessing the target cell.
5)切换执行:终端设备接收切换相关的信息后,在目标小区完成接入流程。5) Handover execution: After receiving the handover-related information, the terminal device completes the access process in the target cell.
示例性的,终端设备向目标小区发送随机接入前导码,以发起在目标小区的随机接入。终端设备在切换过程中使用的随机接入前导码为专用前导码,与初始接入时的基于竞争的随机接入前导码不同。此外,小区切换时网络配置的随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)的周期可以为10/20/40/80/160毫秒(ms)。Exemplarily, the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the target cell to initiate random access in the target cell. The random access preamble used by the terminal device during the handover process is a dedicated preamble, which is different from the contention-based random access preamble during initial access. In addition, the period of the random access channel (RACH) configured by the network during cell handover can be 10/20/40/80/160 milliseconds (ms).
在小区重选过程中,基站以广播形式发送邻区相关的测量配置等参数,终端设备基于信号质量测量值与网络下发的参数(如重选阈值等)进行比较,符合重选条件后自主重选到目标邻区。During the cell reselection process, the base station sends neighboring cell-related measurement configuration and other parameters in broadcast form. The terminal device compares the signal quality measurement value with the parameters sent by the network (such as the reselection threshold, etc.), and autonomously reselects to the target neighboring cell if the reselection conditions are met.
也就是说,NR系统中,终端设备基于信号质量进行小区切换或小区重选。但是,NTN中远近效应不明显,仅基于信号质量进行小区切换或小区重选的效率较低。因此,NTN中提出基于时间、位置(如终端设备与源小区的参考点以及目标小区的参考点之间的距离)等信息,实现NTN网络下的移动性管理。That is to say, in the NR system, the terminal device performs cell switching or cell reselection based on signal quality. However, the near-far effect is not obvious in NTN, and the efficiency of cell switching or cell reselection based only on signal quality is low. Therefore, NTN proposes to implement mobility management under the NTN network based on information such as time and location (such as the distance between the terminal device and the reference point of the source cell and the reference point of the target cell).
然而,基于位置等信息进行的移动性管理,是针对终端设备的移动触发的小区切换/重选设计的。将该方案应用于卫星移动触发的群切换/群重选场景中时,会带来频繁的配置信息更新,如网络需要频繁更新小区的参考点位置信息,从而导致网络侧进行移动性相关配置的信令开销较大。However, mobility management based on location and other information is designed for cell switching/reselection triggered by the movement of terminal devices. When this solution is applied to the group switching/group reselection scenario triggered by satellite movement, it will lead to frequent configuration information updates. For example, the network needs to frequently update the reference point location information of the cell, resulting in a large signaling overhead for mobility-related configuration on the network side.
基于此,本申请提供一种通信方法。该方法中,可以将地面离散为一些相对地球固定的区域,并且这些区域的地理位置可以通过区域的标识确定。因此,网络设备可以向终端设备指示区域的信息(如指示区域总数和/或区域的半径),使得终端设备能够基于区域的信息获知区域分布情况,从而根据终端设备的位置信息和区域分布情况确定终端设备所处的区域,并基于终端设备所处的区域进行移动性管理。相比于网络设备向终端设备直接配置参考点位置信息(如发送参考点的位置坐标等),以使终端设备进行移动性管理,可以降低信令开销。Based on this, the present application provides a communication method. In this method, the ground can be discretized into some fixed areas relative to the earth, and the geographical locations of these areas can be determined by the identification of the areas. Therefore, the network device can indicate the information of the area (such as indicating the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area) to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can obtain the distribution of the area based on the information of the area, thereby determining the area where the terminal device is located according to the location information of the terminal device and the distribution of the area, and performing mobility management based on the area where the terminal device is located. Compared with the network device directly configuring the reference point location information to the terminal device (such as sending the location coordinates of the reference point, etc.) so that the terminal device can perform mobility management, the signaling overhead can be reduced.
本申请实施例的技术方案可用于卫星通信系统、高空平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)通信、无人机等NTN系统。例如,通信、导航一体化(integrated communication and navigation,IcaN)系统、全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS)等。NTN系统可以与传统的移动通信系统相融合。例如:所述移动通信系统可以为第四代(4th generation,4G)通信系统(例如,长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、5G通信系统(例如,NR系统)、设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)通信系统、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信系统、物联网(internet of things,IoT)通信系统、车联网通信系统、以及未来的移动通信系统等。 The technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can be used for NTN systems such as satellite communication systems, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communication, and drones. For example, integrated communication and navigation (IcaN) systems, global navigation satellite systems (GNSS), etc. NTN systems can be integrated with traditional mobile communication systems. For example: the mobile communication system can be a fourth generation (4G) communication system (for example, a long term evolution (LTE) system), a worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, a 5G communication system (for example, a NR system), a device-to-device (D2D) communication system, a machine-to-machine (M2M) communication system, an Internet of Things (IoT) communication system, an Internet of Vehicles communication system, and future mobile communication systems.
其中,上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明,适用本申请的通信系统和通信场景不限于此,本申请提供的通信系统和通信场景对本申请的方案不造成任何限定,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。Among them, the above-mentioned communication system applicable to the present application is only an example, and the communication system and communication scenario applicable to the present application are not limited to this. The communication system and communication scenario provided by the present application do not impose any limitation on the scheme of the present application. They are uniformly explained here and will not be repeated below.
作为一种可能的实现,适用于本申请方案的通信系统可以包括至少一个终端设备和至少一个网络设备。示例性的,终端设备和终端设备之间、终端设备和网络设备之间、以及网络设备和网络设备之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互通信。As a possible implementation, a communication system applicable to the solution of the present application may include at least one terminal device and at least one network device. Exemplarily, terminal devices and terminal devices, terminal devices and network devices, and network devices and network devices may communicate with each other in a wired or wireless manner.
可选的,终端设备可以是具有无线收发功能的用户侧设备,或可以是设置于该设备中的芯片或芯片系统。终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站(mobile station,MS)、远方站、远程终端、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。终端设备例如可以是IoT、V2X、D2D、M2M、5G网络、或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备。终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。Optionally, the terminal device may be a user-side device with wireless transceiver functions, or may be a chip or chip system provided in the device. The terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station (MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile terminal (MT), user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc. The terminal device may be, for example, a terminal device in IoT, V2X, D2D, M2M, 5G network, or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN). The terminal device may be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it may also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.); it may also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons and satellites, etc.).
示例性的,终端设备可以是无人机、IoT设备(例如,传感器,电表,水表等)、V2X设备、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)中的站点(station,ST)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(也可以称为穿戴式智能设备)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有车对车(vehicle-to-vehicle,V2V)通信能力的车辆、智能网联车、具有无人机(unmanned aerial vehicle,UAV)对无人机(UAV to UAV,U2U)通信能力的无人机等等。终端设备可以是移动的,也可以是固定的,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the terminal device can be a drone, an IoT device (e.g., a sensor, an electric meter, a water meter, etc.), a V2X device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA) device, a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device (also called a wearable smart device), a tablet computer or a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) device, or a wearable device. The invention relates to wireless terminals for use in the smart grid, transportation safety, smart cities, smart homes, in-vehicle terminals, vehicles with vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication capabilities, intelligent networked vehicles, drones with unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) to UAV (UAV to UAV, U2U) communication capabilities, etc. The terminal device can be mobile or fixed, and this application does not make specific restrictions on this.
可选的,网络设备可以是具有无线收发功能的网络侧设备,或可以是设置于该设备中的芯片或芯片系统或模块。网络设备位于移动通信系统的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN),用于为终端设备提供接入服务。Optionally, the network device may be a network-side device with wireless transceiver functions, or may be a chip or chip system or module provided in the device. The network device is located in the radio access network (RAN) of the mobile communication system and is used to provide access services for terminal devices.
作为一种可能的实现,网络设备可以是无线中继节点或无线回传节点。例如,网络设备可以作为层1中继设备,用于将物理层信号重新生成(即无线频点过滤,频率转换和放大的处理),而不具有其他更高协议层。As a possible implementation, the network device may be a wireless relay node or a wireless backhaul node. For example, the network device may be a layer 1 relay device for regenerating physical layer signals (i.e., processing of wireless frequency filtering, frequency conversion, and amplification) without other higher protocol layers.
作为另一种可能的实现,网络设备可以实现基站部分或全部功能。例如,网络设备可以是LTE或演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),如传统的宏基站eNB和异构网络场景下的微基站eNB;或者可以是5G系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNodeB或gNB);或者可以是传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP);或者可以是未来演进的PLMN中的基站;或者可以是IoT、V2X、D2D、或M2M中实现基站功能的设备。As another possible implementation, the network device can implement part or all of the functions of a base station. For example, the network device can be an evolutionary Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE or an evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), such as a traditional macro base station eNB and a micro base station eNB in a heterogeneous network scenario; or it can be a next generation node B (gNodeB or gNB) in a 5G system; or it can be a transmission reception point (TRP); or it can be a base station in a future evolved PLMN; or it can be a device that implements base station functions in IoT, V2X, D2D, or M2M.
或者,网络设备可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU和DU,CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。Alternatively, the network device may be a central unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU and a DU, a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU). The CU and the DU may be separately configured or may be included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU). The RU may be included in a radio frequency device or a radio frequency unit, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,网络设备可以是开放无线接入网(open RAN,ORAN)系统中的网络设备或网络设备的模块。在ORAN系统中,CU还可以称为开放(open,O)-CU,DU还可以称为O-DU,CU-CP还可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP还可以称为O-CU-UP,RU还可以称为O-RU。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings. For example, the network device may be a network device or a module of a network device in an open radio access network (open RAN, ORAN) system. In the ORAN system, CU may also be referred to as open (open, O)-CU, DU may also be referred to as O-DU, CU-CP may also be referred to as O-CU-CP, CU-UP may also be referred to as O-CU-UP, and RU may also be referred to as O-RU. Any of the CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
示例性的,本申请实施例中的基站可以包括各种形式的基站,例如:宏基站,微基站(也称为小站),中继站,接入点等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the base stations in the embodiments of the present application may include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, etc., and the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
可选的,本申请实施例中的网络设备可以部署在非地面平台上,例如部署在低空平台(如无人机)、高空平台(如飞机)、或卫星上。因此,本申请实施例中的网络设备也可以称为非地面网络设备。Optionally, the network device in the embodiment of the present application can be deployed on a non-ground platform, for example, deployed on a low-altitude platform (such as a drone), a high-altitude platform (such as an airplane), or a satellite. Therefore, the network device in the embodiment of the present application can also be referred to as a non-ground network device.
示例性的,以网络设备部署在卫星上,或者说网络设备为卫星为例,该通信系统还可以包括NTN网 关(NTN gateway)(或称为关口站)。通常,NTN网关部署在地面。NTN网关可以与卫星进行通信,卫星与NTN网关之间的链路可以称为馈电链路(feeder link)。For example, taking the case where the network device is deployed on a satellite, or the network device is a satellite, the communication system may also include an NTN network. NTN gateway (or gateway station). Usually, NTN gateway is deployed on the ground. NTN gateway can communicate with satellite, and the link between satellite and NTN gateway can be called feeder link.
如图6所示,在卫星作为无线中继节点,或者说卫星具有中继转发功能的情况下,NTN网关具有基站的功能或部分基站功能,此时NTN网关可以作为基站。或者,NTN网关可以与基站分开部署,即除了NTN网关外,该通信系统还包括部署于地面的卫星基站。图6中以NTN网关和基站分开部署为例进行说明。As shown in Figure 6, when the satellite is used as a wireless relay node, or the satellite has a relay forwarding function, the NTN gateway has the function of a base station or part of the base station function, and the NTN gateway can be used as a base station. Alternatively, the NTN gateway can be deployed separately from the base station, that is, in addition to the NTN gateway, the communication system also includes a satellite base station deployed on the ground. Figure 6 takes the NTN gateway and the base station as an example for explanation.
如图7所示,在卫星可以实现基站部分或全部功能的情况下,卫星具有数据处理能力,可以将卫星作为基站。此时,NTN网关和卫星可以通过卫星无线接口(satellite radio interface,SRI)传输终端设备的用户面数据。As shown in Figure 7, when the satellite can realize part or all of the functions of the base station, the satellite has data processing capabilities and can be used as a base station. At this time, the NTN gateway and the satellite can transmit the user plane data of the terminal device through the satellite radio interface (SRI).
此外,卫星可以实现基站部分或全部功能的情况下,如图8所示,不同卫星之间存在星间链路(inter-satellite link,ISL),卫星之间可以通过ISL通信。或者,如图9所示,卫星可以具有基站的DU处理功能,或者说卫星能够作为DU。该场景下,基站的CU处理功能可以部署在地面,CU和DU之间通过NTN网关使用F1接口通信。In addition, in the case where the satellite can realize part or all of the functions of the base station, as shown in Figure 8, there is an inter-satellite link (ISL) between different satellites, and the satellites can communicate through the ISL. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 9, the satellite can have the DU processing function of the base station, or the satellite can act as a DU. In this scenario, the CU processing function of the base station can be deployed on the ground, and the CU and DU communicate using the F1 interface through the NTN gateway.
在图6至图9所示的架构中,NG指基站和核心网之间的接口。Uu指基站和终端设备之间的接口。Xn指基站之间的接口。可以理解的是,随着通信系统的演进,基站和核心网之间的接口名称、基站和终端设备之间的接口名称、以及基站之间的接口名称也可能发生变化,本申请对此不作具体限定。In the architectures shown in FIGS. 6 to 9 , NG refers to the interface between the base station and the core network. Uu refers to the interface between the base station and the terminal device. Xn refers to the interface between base stations. It is understandable that, with the evolution of the communication system, the interface name between the base station and the core network, the interface name between the base station and the terminal device, and the interface name between the base stations may also change, and this application does not specifically limit this.
可选的,卫星作为无线中继节点,具有中继转发功能时,可以认为卫星工作在透传(transparent)模式下。卫星具有数据处理能力,能够实现基站部分或全部功能时,可以认为卫星工作在再生(regenerative)模式下。对于某个卫星,可以仅支持透传模式或仅支持再生模式,也可以支持透传模式和再生模式,并且能够在透传模式和再生模式之间进行切换。Optionally, when a satellite acts as a wireless relay node and has a relay forwarding function, the satellite can be considered to be operating in a transparent mode. When a satellite has data processing capabilities and can realize some or all of the functions of a base station, the satellite can be considered to be operating in a regenerative mode. For a certain satellite, it can support only the transparent mode or only the regenerative mode, or it can support both the transparent mode and the regenerative mode, and can switch between the transparent mode and the regenerative mode.
在一些实施场景下,NTN和地面网络可以融合。示例性的,图10为本申请实施例提供的NTN和地面网络的融合网络架构图。在图10所示的架构中,卫星1和卫星2工作在再生模式下,卫星可以作为NTN基站,或者说NTN基站可以部署在卫星上。卫星3工作在透传模式下,因此需要额外部署NTN基站。其中,NTN基站指NTN中的基站。此外,In some implementation scenarios, NTN and the ground network can be integrated. Exemplarily, FIG10 is a diagram of the integrated network architecture of NTN and the ground network provided in an embodiment of the present application. In the architecture shown in FIG10, satellite 1 and satellite 2 work in regeneration mode, and the satellites can be used as NTN base stations, or NTN base stations can be deployed on satellites. Satellite 3 works in transparent transmission mode, so additional NTN base stations need to be deployed. Among them, NTN base stations refer to base stations in NTN. In addition,
此外,该架构还可以包括地面基站,地面基站指地面网络中的基站。NTN基站和地面基站可以通过共同的核心网实现互联。核心网作为承载网络提供到数据网络的接口,为终端设备提供通信连接、认证、管理、策略控制以及对数据业务完成承载等。示例性的,核心网可以包括接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元,认证服务器功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元、用户面功能(User Plane Function,UPF)网元等等网元。In addition, the architecture may also include ground base stations, which refer to base stations in the ground network. NTN base stations and ground base stations can be interconnected through a common core network. As a bearer network, the core network provides an interface to the data network, provides communication connection, authentication, management, policy control for terminal devices, and completes the bearing of data services. Exemplarily, the core network may include access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, authentication server function (AUSF) network elements, policy control function (PCF) network elements, user plane function (UPF) network elements, and other network elements.
或者,NTN基站和地面基站也可以通过基站间定义的接口实现更高时效性的协助和互联。示例性的,基站间的接口可以为Xn接口,基站和核心网间的接口可以为NG接口。当然,基站间的接口、基站和核心网间的接口也可以有其他实现,本申请对此不作具体限定。Alternatively, the NTN base station and the ground base station can also achieve more timely assistance and interconnection through the interface defined between the base stations. Exemplarily, the interface between the base stations can be an Xn interface, and the interface between the base station and the core network can be an NG interface. Of course, the interface between the base stations and the interface between the base station and the core network can also be implemented in other ways, which are not specifically limited in this application.
可选的,本申请实施例中,卫星可以通过波束向终端设备提供服务,例如不同的波束可以通过时分、频分和空分中的一种或多种方式为终端设备提供服务。一方面,卫星可以工作在再生模式下,也可以工作在透传模式下。另一方面,卫星可以工作在非凝视模式或凝视模式下。卫星可以是LEO卫星、MEO卫星、GEO卫星等,不予限制。Optionally, in an embodiment of the present application, the satellite can provide services to the terminal device through a beam. For example, different beams can provide services to the terminal device through one or more of time division, frequency division and space division. On the one hand, the satellite can operate in a regeneration mode or a transparent transmission mode. On the other hand, the satellite can operate in a non-staring mode or a staring mode. The satellite can be a LEO satellite, a MEO satellite, a GEO satellite, etc., without limitation.
可以理解的是,上述图6至图10所述架构中的卫星均可以替换为无人机、飞机等其他飞行平台上的地面载荷。It is understandable that the satellites in the architectures described in Figures 6 to 10 above can be replaced by ground payloads on other flying platforms such as drones and airplanes.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例描述的通信系统是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It should be noted that the communication system described in the embodiment of the present application is for the purpose of more clearly illustrating the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application. A person of ordinary skill in the art can know that with the evolution of network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is also applicable to similar technical problems.
下面结合图6至图10所示的通信系统,以网络设备和终端设备之间的交互为例,对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行描述。The following describes the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application by taking the interaction between a network device and a terminal device as an example in combination with the communication system shown in Figures 6 to 10.
需要说明的是,本申请下述实施例中,各个设备之间的消息名称、各参数的名称、或各信息的名称等只是一个示例,在其他的实施例中也可以是其他的名称,本申请所提供的方法对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that in the following embodiments of the present application, the message names between the devices, the names of the parameters, or the names of the information are only examples. In other embodiments, they may also be other names, and the method provided in the present application does not make any specific limitations on this.
可以理解的,本申请实施例中,执行主体可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤,这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。It is understandable that in the embodiments of the present application, the execution subject may execute some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application, and these steps or operations are only examples. The embodiments of the present application may also execute other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, the various steps may be executed in different orders presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it is possible that not all operations in the embodiments of the present application need to be executed.
作为一种示例,下述实施例中以上述提到的飞行平台为卫星,即以NTN中的卫星通信为例进行说明。 当然,该方法也可以适用于NTN中的其他场景,例如LAP subnetwork或HAP subnetwork中,对此不作具体限定。As an example, in the following embodiments, the above-mentioned flying platform is a satellite, that is, satellite communication in NTN is taken as an example for description. Of course, this method can also be applied to other scenarios in the NTN, such as LAP subnetwork or HAP subnetwork, and is not specifically limited thereto.
为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案,首先给出本申请中相关名词的简要介绍如下。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, a brief introduction to the relevant terms in the present application is first given as follows.
1、区域:1. Region:
除特殊说明外,本申请下述实施例中的“区域”均指地理区域。区域相对于地球固定,或者理解为区域指相对地球固定的地理区域。示例性的,区域可以具有以下至少一项属性:形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积、地理位置等。Unless otherwise specified, the "region" in the following embodiments of the present application refers to a geographical region. The region is fixed relative to the earth, or it is understood that the region refers to a geographical region fixed relative to the earth. Exemplarily, the region can have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographical location, etc.
“区域”还可以具有高度属性,即区域可以理解为某个给定高度或高度范围的地理区域。默认情况下,区域可以指地面上海拔高度为0千米(km)或海拔高度在0km左右(如[-2,2]km范围内)的地理区域,或者指某个平均海拔高度的地理区域。此外,也可以指其他特定高度或特定高度范围的地理区域,例如海拔高度为10km的地理区域,或海拔高度在10km左右(如[7,13]km范围内)的地理区域。"Region" can also have a height attribute, that is, the region can be understood as a geographical area of a given height or height range. By default, the region can refer to a geographical area with an altitude of 0 kilometers (km) above the ground or an altitude of about 0km (such as in the range of [-2, 2]km), or a geographical area with an average altitude. In addition, it can also refer to geographical areas of other specific heights or specific altitude ranges, such as a geographical area with an altitude of 10km, or a geographical area with an altitude of about 10km (such as in the range of [7, 13]km).
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述相对于地球固定的区域也可以称为“波位”、“广播波位”、“地理区域”等。当然,还可以有其他名称,本申请对相对于地球固定的区域的名称不作具体限定。In a possible implementation, the above-mentioned region fixed relative to the earth may also be called a "wave position", "broadcast wave position", "geographical region", etc. Of course, there may be other names, and the present application does not specifically limit the name of the region fixed relative to the earth.
不同区域的形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积可以相同也可以不相同。不同区域的地理位置不同。不同区域之间可以存在重叠也可以不存在重叠。The shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas of different regions may be the same or different. Different regions may have different geographical locations. Different regions may or may not overlap.
在一种可能的实施方式中,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不变,例如区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不随时间的变化而变化。或者,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域轮廓以及区域中的点可以通过地心地固(earth-centered earth-fixed,ECEF)坐标、大地坐标系(geodetic coordinate system)、地心惯性(earth-centered inertial,ECI)坐标系等三维坐标系描述,或区域轮廓上的各个点在ECEF、大地坐标系、ECI坐标系等三维坐标系中的坐标固定不变。In a possible implementation, the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline, size or geographical location of the region remains unchanged, for example, the outline, size or geographical location of the region does not change with time. Alternatively, the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline of the region and the points in the region can be described by a three-dimensional coordinate system such as earth-centered earth-fixed (ECEF) coordinates, geodetic coordinate system, earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the outline of the region in a three-dimensional coordinate system such as ECEF, geodetic coordinate system, ECI coordinate system, etc. are fixed and unchanged.
在一种可能的实施方式中,区域的形状可以为正六边形,或者为其他形状如正五边形、圆形、椭圆形等。或者,区域的形状还可以为不规则形状,不予限制。In a possible implementation, the shape of the region may be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc. Alternatively, the shape of the region may also be an irregular shape, which is not limited.
示例性的,区域的形状可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域形状可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域形状。类似的,区域的大小、半径、面积也可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域大小、半径、面积可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域大小、多种区域半径、或多种区域面积。Exemplarily, the shape of the area may be defined by a protocol or may be defined by a network device. The shapes of the areas defined by different network devices may be the same or different. The same network device may also define multiple shapes of areas. Similarly, the size, radius, and area of the area may be defined by a protocol or may be defined by a network device. The size, radius, and area of the areas defined by different network devices may be the same or different. The same network device may also define multiple area sizes, multiple area radii, or multiple area areas.
在一种可能的实施方式中,可以在地球上划分多个区域,并对多个区域进行索引(如编号)。In a possible implementation, the earth may be divided into multiple regions, and the multiple regions may be indexed (eg, numbered).
作为一种可能的划分方式,该区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的,即可以根据某个区域的标识得到该区域的地理位置,或者说,区域的标识和区域的地理位置之间存在关联关系。示例性的,可以在地球上离散出多个区域,每个区域对应一个标识,区域的地理位置可以根据该区域的标识得到。As a possible division method, the geographical location of the region is determined by the identifier of the region, that is, the geographical location of the region can be obtained according to the identifier of a region, or in other words, there is a correlation between the identifier of the region and the geographical location of the region. For example, multiple regions can be discretized on the earth, each region corresponds to an identifier, and the geographical location of the region can be obtained according to the identifier of the region.
进一步的,区域的地理位置还可以根据以下至少一项确定:区域总数Nspot、区域的半径Rspot、或地球半径Re。Furthermore, the geographical location of the area may also be determined according to at least one of the following: the total number of areas N spot , the radius of the area R spot , or the radius of the earth Re .
示例性的,区域总数可以理解为在地球上离散出的区域总数。该Nspot个区域可以完全覆盖地球,如地球上的任意位置均属于某个区域;或者,该Nspot个区域也可以覆盖地球上的部分地理位置,例如,该Nspot个区域可以不覆盖地球南极和/或北极,即南极和/或北极可以不存在该区域。Nspot为正整数,例如Nspot=78702。Exemplarily, the total number of regions can be understood as the total number of regions discretely located on the earth. The N spot regions can completely cover the earth, such as any location on the earth belongs to a certain region; or, the N spot regions can also cover some geographical locations on the earth, for example, the N spot regions may not cover the South Pole and/or the North Pole of the earth, that is, the South Pole and/or the North Pole may not exist in the region. N spot is a positive integer, for example, N spot =78702.
示例性的,该Nspot个区域的半径可以相同,即每个区域的半径均为Rspot。在区域的形状为正六边形的情况下,区域的半径可以为正六边形外接圆的半径;在区域的形状为圆形的情况下,区域的半径可以为圆形的半径;在区域的形状为椭圆形的情况下,区域的半径可以包括长半径或短半径。Rspot的单位可以为千米(km),例如Rspot=50千米,或者也可以为米(m)等其他长度单位,不予限制。Exemplarily, the radii of the N spot areas may be the same, that is, the radius of each area is R spot . When the shape of the area is a regular hexagon, the radius of the area may be the radius of the circumscribed circle of the regular hexagon; when the shape of the area is a circle, the radius of the area may be the radius of the circle; when the shape of the area is an ellipse, the radius of the area may include a long radius or a short radius. The unit of R spot may be kilometers (km), for example, R spot = 50 kilometers, or may be other length units such as meters (m), without limitation.
示例性的,本申请实施例中,地球半径可以为常数,例如取值6378km;或者,对于不同时空位置,地球半径可以不同,例如,地球半径可以包括赤道半径或极半径。例如,在南极和/或北极划分区域时,可以使用极半径;在非两极地区划分区域时,可以使用赤道半径。或者,当用椭球描述地球(即认为地球的形状为椭球形)时,地球半径可能包括长轴和短轴,且长轴和短轴的取值存在差异。Exemplarily, in an embodiment of the present application, the radius of the earth may be a constant, such as a value of 6378 km; or, the radius of the earth may be different for different time and space positions, for example, the radius of the earth may include an equatorial radius or a polar radius. For example, when dividing regions at the South Pole and/or the North Pole, the polar radius may be used; when dividing regions in non-polar regions, the equatorial radius may be used. Alternatively, when an ellipsoid is used to describe the earth (i.e., the shape of the earth is considered to be an ellipsoid), the radius of the earth may include a major axis and a minor axis, and there are differences in the values of the major axis and the minor axis.
作为一种可能的实现,区域总数、区域的半径以及地球半径对每个区域来说可以是相同的,即可以认为区域总数、区域的半径以及地球半径是常量。此时,可以认为影响区域的地理位置的变量即为区域的标识。As a possible implementation, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth may be the same for each region, that is, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth may be considered constants. In this case, the variable affecting the geographical location of the region may be considered to be the identifier of the region.
在一种可能的实施方式中,每个区域中包括(或存在)一个参考位置,该参考位置例如可以为区域的中心位置。示例性的,区域的地理位置可以指该区域中的参考位置的地理位置,此时,区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的,可以理解为:区域中的参考位置是由区域的标识确定的;或者,区域的地理位置可 以表示区域的轮廓或区域的范围,此时,可以根据区域的标识确定区域中的参考位置的地理位置,再根据参考位置的地理位置和区域的半径确定区域的范围或轮廓。In a possible implementation, each region includes (or has) a reference position, which may be, for example, the center position of the region. Exemplarily, the geographic location of a region may refer to the geographic location of the reference position in the region. In this case, the geographic location of the region is determined by the identifier of the region, which may be understood as follows: the reference position in the region is determined by the identifier of the region; or the geographic location of the region may be To represent the outline of the area or the range of the area, at this time, the geographical location of the reference position in the area can be determined according to the identification of the area, and then the range or outline of the area can be determined according to the geographical location of the reference position and the radius of the area.
作为一种可能的实现,区域中的参考位置和区域的标识之间的关联关系是根据斐波那契准则确定的,或者说该区域中的参考位置和区域的标识之间的关联关系满足斐波那契准则。示例性的,该关联关系存在如下三种实现方式:As a possible implementation, the association relationship between the reference position in the region and the identification of the region is determined according to the Fibonacci criterion, or in other words, the association relationship between the reference position in the region and the identification of the region satisfies the Fibonacci criterion. Exemplarily, there are the following three implementations of the association relationship:
方式一、区域中参考位置的三维坐标和该区域的标识满足如下关系(1):
Method 1: The three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (1):
其中,i表示区域的标识。Re表示地球半径。[x]表示x的小数部分,如x=2.3,则[x]=0.3。Nspot表示区域总数。RL(i)表示区域中参考位置的三维坐标,该三维坐标是指在三维坐标系中的坐标。示例性的,三维坐标系可以是球面坐标系,如ECEF坐标系。当然,还可以是其他三维坐标系,如大地坐标系(geodetic coordinate system),地心惯性(earth-centered inertial,ECI)坐标系等。Wherein, i represents the identifier of the area. Re represents the radius of the earth. [x] represents the decimal part of x, such as x=2.3, then [x]=0.3. N spot represents the total number of areas. RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the area, and the three-dimensional coordinates refer to the coordinates in the three-dimensional coordinate system. Exemplarily, the three-dimensional coordinate system can be a spherical coordinate system, such as the ECEF coordinate system. Of course, it can also be other three-dimensional coordinate systems, such as the geodetic coordinate system, the earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, etc.
示例性的,该参考位置在单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(xi)=(1-cosθi)/2
Exemplarily, the projection RL(x i ,y i ) of the reference position on the unit square and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi ) = (1 - cosθi ) / 2
其中,θi和可参考上述相关说明。单位正方形指笛卡尔平面中顶点位于(0,0)、(1,0)、(0,1)和(1,1)的正方形。RL(xi)表示参考位置在单位正方形的x轴方向的投影度量,RL(yi)表示参考位置在单位正方形的y轴方向的投影度量。Among them, θ i and Please refer to the above related instructions. The unit square refers to the square in the Cartesian plane with vertices at (0,0), (1,0), (0,1) and (1,1). RL( xi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the x-axis direction of the unit square, and RL( yi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position in the y-axis direction of the unit square.
示例性的,该参考位置在斐波那契网格中的笛卡尔坐标RL(xi,yi)和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(xi)=i/Nspot
Exemplarily, the Cartesian coordinates RL (x i , y i ) of the reference position in the Fibonacci grid and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi )=i/ Nspot
其中,[x]表示x的小数部分。RL(xi)表示区域的参考位置在笛卡尔坐标系下x轴方向的投影度量,RL(yi)表示区域的参考位置在笛卡尔坐标系下y轴方向的投影度量。示例性的,笛卡尔坐标系指笛卡尔直角坐标系。Wherein, [x] represents the fractional part of x. RL( xi ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position of the region in the x-axis direction in the Cartesian coordinate system, and RL( y ) represents the projection measurement of the reference position of the region in the y-axis direction in the Cartesian coordinate system. Exemplarily, the Cartesian coordinate system refers to the Cartesian rectangular coordinate system.
方式二、区域中参考位置的三维坐标和该区域的标识满足如下关系(2):
Method 2: The three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (2):
其中,各个参数的物理含义可参考上述关系(1)中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。The physical meaning of each parameter can be found in the relevant description in the above relationship (1), which will not be repeated here.
可以理解的,上述关系(1)和关系(2)所示的参考位置的三维坐标均可以等价转换为经纬度位置,本申请对参考位置的具体表现形式不作限定。It can be understood that the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference positions shown in the above relationship (1) and relationship (2) can be equivalently converted into longitude and latitude positions, and the present application does not limit the specific form of expression of the reference positions.
方式三、区域中参考位置的经纬度坐标和该区域的标识满足如下关系(3):
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i)) (3)
Method 3: The latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position in the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (3):
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i)) (3)
其中,RL(i)表示参考位置的经纬度坐标,如lon(i)表示参考位置的经度,lat(i)表示参考位置的纬度。Nspot表示区域总数。Where RL(i) represents the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference location, such as lon(i) represents the longitude of the reference location, and lat(i) represents the latitude of the reference location. N spot represents the total number of areas.
可以理解的,上述关系(3)所示的参考位置的经纬度坐标可以等价转换为三维坐标,本申请对参考位 置的具体表现形式不作限定。It can be understood that the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position shown in the above relationship (3) can be equivalently converted into three-dimensional coordinates. The specific form of the setting is not limited.
作为一种可能的实现,区域的半径和区域总数满足如下关系(4):
As a possible implementation, the radius of the region and the total number of regions satisfy the following relationship (4):
其中,Re表示地球半径,Nspot表示区域总数,Rspot表示区域的半径。各个参数的解释可参考前述相关说明,在此不再赘述。Among them, Re represents the radius of the earth, N spot represents the total number of areas, and R spot represents the radius of the area. The explanation of each parameter can refer to the above related description, which will not be repeated here.
基于上述几种可能的设计,一方面,可以根据区域的标识快速、准确地确定区域中参考位置的坐标,从而可以快速、准确地确定区域的轮廓、地理位置等。另一方面,可以灵活调整区域的半径,以适配不同载荷能力,例如适配不同波束半径。再一方面,由于区域的地理位置可以通过区域的标识确定,因此,网络设备和终端设备之间可以基于区域的标识进行信息交互。相比于直接发送参考点位置信息以进行移动性管理,可以显著降低信令开销;相比于基于H3地理网格进行划分的方式,由于区域总数相对较少,因此指示区域标识所需的比特数也较少,从而也可以降低信令开销。Based on the above possible designs, on the one hand, the coordinates of the reference position in the area can be quickly and accurately determined according to the identification of the area, so that the outline, geographical location, etc. of the area can be quickly and accurately determined. On the other hand, the radius of the area can be flexibly adjusted to adapt to different load capacities, such as adapting to different beam radii. On the other hand, since the geographical location of the area can be determined by the identification of the area, information exchange can be carried out between network devices and terminal devices based on the identification of the area. Compared with directly sending reference point location information for mobility management, the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced; compared with the division method based on the H3 geographic grid, since the total number of areas is relatively small, the number of bits required to indicate the area identification is also small, which can also reduce the signaling overhead.
2、网络设备的覆盖区域:2. Coverage area of network equipment:
网络设备的覆盖区域可以指网络设备能够覆盖的最大区域,或者说,网络设备的覆盖区域指示(或体现)第一网络设备的最大覆盖能力。The coverage area of a network device may refer to a maximum area that the network device can cover, or in other words, the coverage area of the network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum coverage capability of the first network device.
网络设备的覆盖区域随网络设备的运动而变化,即不同时刻网络设备的覆盖区域可能不同。网络设备的覆盖区域包括至少一个上述区域(即波位)。The coverage area of the network device changes with the movement of the network device, that is, the coverage area of the network device may be different at different times. The coverage area of the network device includes at least one of the above areas (ie, wave positions).
由于网络设备的覆盖区域随网络设备的运动而变化,而区域(波位)是相对地球固定的,因此,不同时刻网络设备的覆盖区域包括的波位可能不同。Since the coverage area of the network device changes with the movement of the network device, and the area (wave position) is fixed relative to the earth, the wave positions included in the coverage area of the network device may be different at different times.
示例性的,以区域的形状为正六边形为例,如图11所示,椭圆形的实线可以表示网络设备的覆盖区域。椭圆形实线中的所有正六边形表示的区域为网络设备的覆盖区域所包括的区域。For example, taking the shape of the area as a regular hexagon, as shown in Figure 11, the solid ellipse line can represent the coverage area of the network device. The areas represented by all the regular hexagons in the solid ellipse line are the areas included in the coverage area of the network device.
3、网络设备的服务区域:3. Service area of network equipment:
网络设备的服务区域可以指网络设备的波束能够服务(或覆盖)的最大区域,或者说,网络设备的服务区域指示(或体现)第一网络设备的最大服务能力。The service area of a network device may refer to the maximum area that a beam of the network device can serve (or cover), or in other words, the service area of the network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum service capability of the first network device.
网络设备的服务区域小于或等于网络设备的覆盖区域。示例性的,基于图11所示的示例,第一网络设备的服务区域可以为椭圆形实线表示的范围,此时,第一网络设备的服务区域等于第一网络设备的覆盖区域;或者,第一网络设备的服务区域也可以小于椭圆形实线表示的范围。The service area of the network device is smaller than or equal to the coverage area of the network device. Exemplarily, based on the example shown in FIG11 , the service area of the first network device may be the range indicated by the solid ellipse, in which case the service area of the first network device is equal to the coverage area of the first network device; or the service area of the first network device may also be smaller than the range indicated by the solid ellipse.
网络设备的服务区域随网络设备的运动而变化,即不同时刻网络设备的服务区域可能不同。网络设备的服务区域包括至少一个上述区域(即波位)。The service area of the network device changes with the movement of the network device, that is, the service area of the network device may be different at different times. The service area of the network device includes at least one of the above areas (ie, wave positions).
由于网络设备的服务区域随网络设备的运动而变化,而区域(波位)是相对地球固定的,因此,不同时刻网络设备的服务区域包括的波位可能不同。Since the service area of a network device changes with the movement of the network device, and the area (wavelength) is fixed relative to the earth, the wavelengths included in the service area of the network device may be different at different times.
此外,在某一时刻,网络设备的波束实际上可能服务(或覆盖)该服务区域中的部分区域,在不同时刻,网络设备的波束可能服务(或覆盖)服务区域中的不同区域。示例性的,如图11中的(a)所示,在时刻T1,网络设备的波束服务服务区域中的区域x1、x2和x3;如图11中的(b)所示,在时刻T2,网络设备的波束服务服务区域中的区域y1、y2、y3和y4。In addition, at a certain moment, the beam of the network device may actually serve (or cover) a part of the service area, and at different moments, the beam of the network device may serve (or cover) different areas in the service area. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 11 , at time T1, the beam of the network device serves areas x1, x2, and x3 in the service area; as shown in (b) of FIG. 11 , at time T2, the beam of the network device serves areas y1, y2, y3, and y4 in the service area.
4、网络设备的激活区域:4. Activation area of network equipment:
当前正在被网络设备的波束服务(或覆盖)的区域可以称为激活区域,或者被激活的区域。当前未被网络设备的波束服务(或覆盖)的区域可以称为未激活区域,或者未被激活的区域。The area currently being served (or covered) by the beam of the network device may be referred to as an activated area, or an activated area. The area currently not being served (or covered) by the beam of the network device may be referred to as an inactivated area, or an inactivated area.
下面对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行介绍。参见图12,为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图,该通信方法可以包括如下步骤:The communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application is introduced below. Referring to FIG. 12 , which is a flow chart of a communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the communication method may include the following steps:
S1201、第一网络设备获取第一信息。S1201. A first network device obtains first information.
其中,第一信息指示区域的信息。该区域相对于地球固定。该区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的。可参考上述对区域的相关说明,在此不再赘述。The first information indicates information of the region. The region is fixed relative to the earth. The geographical location of the region is determined by the identifier of the region. Please refer to the above description of the region, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息指示区域的信息,可以理解为:第一信息指示区域的划分或分布。例如,第一信息指示区域总数Nspot和/或区域的半径Rspot。区域总数和区域的半径可参考上述对区域的相关说明,在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation, the information of the first information indicating the area can be understood as: the first information indicating the division or distribution of the area. For example, the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius of the area R spot . The total number of areas and the radius of the area can refer to the above description of the area, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,区域总数和/或区域的半径可以理解为第一网络设备生效或使用的区域总数和/或区域的半径;或者,可以为第二网络设备生效或使用的区域总数和/或区域的半径。第二网络设备可以为第一网络设备的相邻网络设备。不同网络设备生效或使用的区域总数和/或区域的半径可以相同也可以不同,不予限制。 Exemplarily, the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area can be understood as the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area that are effective or used by a first network device; or, it can be the total number of areas and/or the radius of an area that are effective or used by a second network device. The second network device can be an adjacent network device to the first network device. The total number of areas and/or the radius of an area that are effective or used by different network devices can be the same or different, without limitation.
示例性的,在区域总数已知的情况下,即可获知区域的标识,例如区域标识属于1,2,…,Nspot,基于各个区域的标识即可获知各个区域的地理位置,例如区域的标识及其参考位置满足上述关系(1)至关系(3)中的一种,从而可以获知Nspot个区域的地理位置,即获知区域的分布。Exemplarily, when the total number of areas is known, the identification of the area can be obtained, for example, the area identification belongs to 1, 2, ..., N spot , and the geographical location of each area can be obtained based on the identification of each area. For example, the identification of the area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3), so that the geographical location of N spot areas can be known, that is, the distribution of the areas can be known.
此外,在区域的半径已知的情况下,可以根据区域的半径和区域总数的关系,例如上述关系(4),确定区域总数,再根据区域的标识确定各个区域的地理位置,从而确定区域的分布。In addition, when the radius of the region is known, the total number of regions can be determined based on the relationship between the radius of the region and the total number of regions, such as the above relationship (4), and then the geographical location of each region can be determined based on the region identification, thereby determining the distribution of the regions.
示例性的,第一信息可以包括区域总数Nspot和/或区域的半径Rspot的具体取值。或者,协议可以预先定义多种区域总数,或网络设备和终端设备可以预先协商多种区域总数,该场景下,第一信息可以包括区域总数索引,该区域总数索引对应多种区域总数中的一种。例如,共定义N个区域总数,第一信息可以包括索引n,n∈1,2,…,N,则第一信息指示的区域总数即为N个区域总数中的第n个区域总数。Exemplarily, the first information may include specific values of the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius of the area R spot . Alternatively, the protocol may predefine multiple total numbers of areas, or the network device and the terminal device may pre-negotiate multiple total numbers of areas. In this scenario, the first information may include an index of the total number of areas, which corresponds to one of the multiple total numbers of areas. For example, a total number of N areas is defined, and the first information may include an index n, n∈1,2,…,N, then the total number of areas indicated by the first information is the total number of n-th areas in the total number of N areas.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息指示第一网络设备生效的区域总数和/或区域的半径的情况下,第一网络设备获取第一信息,可以包括:第一网络设备确定或生成第一信息;或者,第一网络设备接收第一信息,例如,第一网络设备接收来自地面设备的第一信息,即第一信息由地面设备生成,并向第一网络设备发送。In a possible implementation, when the first information indicates the total number of areas and/or the radius of the areas in which the first network device is effective, the first network device obtains the first information, which may include: the first network device determines or generates the first information; or, the first network device receives the first information, for example, the first network device receives the first information from a ground device, that is, the first information is generated by the ground device and sent to the first network device.
示例性的,在第一网络设备为部署在卫星上,具有部分或全部基站功能的设备的情况下,第一网络设备确定或生成第一信息。在第一网络设备部署在卫星上,且工作在透传模式的情况下,第一网络设备接收来自核心网网元或部署于地面的NTN基站的第一信息。Exemplarily, when the first network device is a device deployed on a satellite and has some or all base station functions, the first network device determines or generates the first information. When the first network device is deployed on a satellite and works in a transparent transmission mode, the first network device receives the first information from a core network element or an NTN base station deployed on the ground.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息指示第二网络设备生效的区域总数和/或区域的半径的情况下,第一网络设备获取第一信息,可以包括:第一网络设备接收来自第二网络设备的第一信息。In another possible implementation, when the first information indicates the total number of areas and/or the radius of the areas where the second network device is effective, the first network device acquiring the first information may include: the first network device receiving the first information from the second network device.
S1202、第一网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息。相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的第一信息。S1202: The first network device sends first information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first information from the first network device.
示例性的,第一网络设备可以通过广播方式发送第一信息。例如,第一网络设备发送小区系统信息,在该系统信息中携带第一信息。或者,第一网络设备可以通过单播方式向某个终端设备发送第一信息,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the first network device may send the first information in a broadcast manner. For example, the first network device sends cell system information, and the system information carries the first information. Alternatively, the first network device may send the first information to a terminal device in a unicast manner, which is not specifically limited in this application.
可以理解的是,第一网络设备通过广播方式发送第一信息的情况下,小区中的任一终端设备均可以实现或执行本申请实施例提供的方法中由终端设备实现的功能。It can be understood that when the first network device sends the first information by broadcasting, any terminal device in the cell can implement or execute the function implemented by the terminal device in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
S1203、终端设备根据终端设备的位置信息和第一信息确定第一区域的标识。其中,第一区域为终端设备所处的区域。S1203: The terminal device determines an identifier of a first area according to the location information of the terminal device and the first information, wherein the first area is an area where the terminal device is located.
示例性的,终端设备的位置信息可以为终端设备的GNSS位置信息。第一区域可以为第一信息指示的Nspot个区域中,参考位置与终端设备距离最近的区域。Exemplarily, the location information of the terminal device may be GNSS location information of the terminal device. The first area may be an area in which the reference location is closest to the terminal device among the N spot areas indicated by the first information.
示例性的,第一信息指示区域总数Nspot和/或区域的半径Rspot的情况下,终端设备接收第一信息后,可以获知区域总数Nspot,从而可以获知区域的标识,例如区域标识属于1,2,…,Nspot。基于各个区域的标识即可获知各个区域中参考位置的地理位置,例如区域的标识及其参考位置满足上述关系(1)至关系(3)中的一种,从而可以获知终端设备与各个区域中的参考位置之间的距离,进而将距离终端设备最近的参考位置所属的区域确定为第一区域。Exemplarily, when the first information indicates the total number of areas N spot and/or the radius of the area R spot , after receiving the first information, the terminal device can obtain the total number of areas N spot , and thus can obtain the identification of the area, for example, the area identification belongs to 1, 2, ..., N spot . Based on the identification of each area, the geographical location of the reference position in each area can be obtained, for example, the identification of the area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3), so that the distance between the terminal device and the reference position in each area can be obtained, and then the area to which the reference position closest to the terminal device belongs is determined as the first area.
S1204、终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理。S1204: The terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area.
示例性的,移动性管理可以包括以下至少一项:邻区测量、小区重选、小区切换等。当然,移动性管理还可以包括其他实现,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the mobility management may include at least one of the following: neighboring cell measurement, cell reselection, cell switching, etc. Of course, the mobility management may also include other implementations, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
基于上述方案,可以将地面离散为一些相对地球固定的区域,并且这些区域的地理位置可以通过区域的标识确定。因此,网络设备可以向终端设备指示区域的信息(如指示区域总数和/或区域的半径),使得终端设备能够基于区域的信息获知区域分布情况,从而根据终端设备的位置信息和区域分布情况确定终端设备所处的区域,并基于终端设备所处的区域进行移动性管理。相比于网络设备向终端设备直接配置参考点位置信息(如发送参考点的位置坐标等),以使终端设备进行移动性管理,可以降低信令开销。Based on the above scheme, the ground can be discretized into some fixed areas relative to the earth, and the geographical locations of these areas can be determined by the identification of the areas. Therefore, the network device can indicate the information of the area (such as indicating the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area) to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can obtain the distribution of the area based on the information of the area, thereby determining the area where the terminal device is located according to the location information of the terminal device and the distribution of the area, and performing mobility management based on the area where the terminal device is located. Compared with the network device directly configuring the reference point location information to the terminal device (such as sending the location coordinates of the reference point, etc.) so that the terminal device can perform mobility management, the signaling overhead can be reduced.
以上对本申请实施例提供的通信方法的整体流程进行了说明,下面对终端设备进行移动性管理的实现进行详细介绍。示例性的,终端设备可以通过如下五种方式进行移动性管理:The above describes the overall process of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. The following describes in detail the implementation of mobility management of the terminal device. Exemplarily, the terminal device can perform mobility management in the following five ways:
方式一、如图13所示,终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:Method 1: As shown in FIG13 , the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
S120411、终端设备根据第一区域的标识确定第一区域中的参考位置。S120411. The terminal device determines a reference position in the first area according to an identifier of the first area.
示例性的,第一区域的标识和第一区域中的参考位置可以满足上述关系(1)至关系(3)中的至少一种,可参考上述相关说明,在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, the identifier of the first area and the reference position in the first area may satisfy at least one of the above relationships (1) to (3). Please refer to the above related descriptions and will not be repeated here.
S120412、终端设备根据第一区域中的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一仰角,确定第一小区的剩余服务时间。 S120412. The terminal device determines the remaining service time of the first cell based on the reference position in the first area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle.
作为一种可能的实现,第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角。第一小区中的每个区域中的参考位置处的仰角均大于或等于第一仰角。其中,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区,第一小区可以为终端设备当前的服务小区。As a possible implementation, the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell. The elevation angle at the reference position in each area of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle. The first cell is a cell managed by the first network device, and the first cell may be a current service cell of the terminal device.
作为另一种可能的实现,第一仰角为第一区域对应的最小仰角。在仰角大于或等于第一仰角的情况下,第一区域被第一网络设备完全覆盖。As another possible implementation, the first elevation angle is a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area. When the elevation angle is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle, the first area is completely covered by the first network device.
示例性的,对于地球上的某个位置,视线在水平线以上时,在视线所在的垂直平面内,视线与水平线之间的夹角可以理解为仰角。在该形式3中,参考位置处的仰角可以理解为参考位置和第一网络设备的位置之间的连线与参考位置处的地平线之间的夹角。通过参考位置处的仰角可以描述第一网络设备经过参考位置上方的位置。例如,参考位置处的仰角为90°,表示第一网络设备位于该参考位置的正上方。Exemplarily, for a certain position on the earth, when the line of sight is above the horizontal line, the angle between the line of sight and the horizontal line in the vertical plane where the line of sight is located can be understood as the elevation angle. In this form 3, the elevation angle at the reference position can be understood as the angle between the line between the reference position and the position of the first network device and the horizon at the reference position. The elevation angle at the reference position can be used to describe the position of the first network device passing above the reference position. For example, the elevation angle at the reference position is 90°, indicating that the first network device is located directly above the reference position.
如图14中的(a)所示,示出了参考位置位于点P时的仰角;如图14中的(b)所示,示出了参考位置位于点Q时的仰角。As shown in (a) of FIG. 14 , the elevation angle when the reference position is at point P is shown; as shown in (b) of FIG. 14 , the elevation angle when the reference position is at point Q is shown.
作为一种可能的实现,第一网络设备的星历信息描述第一网络设备的随时间而变的位置和速度的表达式。当然,星历信息还可以有其他名称,如轨迹信息、速度轨迹信息等,本申请对此不作具体限定。As a possible implementation, the ephemeris information of the first network device describes the expression of the position and speed of the first network device that changes with time. Of course, the ephemeris information can also have other names, such as trajectory information, speed trajectory information, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
示例性的,第一区域中的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息、第一仰角γ0、第一小区的剩余服务时间Tc可以满足如下关系:
Tc=1/w×arccos(cos(γ0)/cos(γm))Exemplarily, the reference position in the first area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, the first elevation angle γ 0 , and the remaining service time T c of the first cell may satisfy the following relationship:
T c =1/w×arccos(cos(γ 0 )/cos(γ m ))
其中,w为第一网络设备在三维坐标系(如地心惯性坐标系ECI)下的角速度,γm可以基于第一区域中的参考位置和第一网络设备的星历信息计算得到。Wherein, w is the angular velocity of the first network device in a three-dimensional coordinate system (such as the geocentric inertial coordinate system ECI), and γm can be calculated based on a reference position in the first area and the ephemeris information of the first network device.
S120413、终端设备在第一小区的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。S120413. The terminal device starts neighbor cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first cell ends.
示例性的,若第一小区的剩余服务时间的起始时刻为t1,结束时刻为t2,那么,终端设备在t2时刻之前,启动邻区测量。Exemplarily, if the starting time of the remaining service time of the first cell is t1 and the ending time is t2, then the terminal device starts the neighboring cell measurement before time t2.
作为一种可能的实现,启动邻区测量,也可以理解为执行邻区测量。邻区测量结果可以用于终端设备进行小区重选。As a possible implementation, starting the neighboring cell measurement can also be understood as executing the neighboring cell measurement. The neighboring cell measurement result can be used by the terminal device to perform cell reselection.
方式二、如图15所示,终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:Mode 2, as shown in FIG15 , the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
S120421、终端设备根据第一区域的标识确定第一区域中的参考位置。可参考上述步骤S120411中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。S120421. The terminal device determines a reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area. Please refer to the relevant description in the above step S120411, which will not be repeated here.
S120422、终端设备在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。S120422. The terminal device performs neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window.
其中,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差。示例性的,如图16所示,第一时延为第一区域中的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延;第二时延为第一区域中的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。The offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between the first delay and the second delay. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG16, the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device; the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device.
示例性的,可以根据第一网络设备的星历信息确定第一网络设备的位置,再确定第一区域中的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延。类似的,可以根据第二网络设备的星历信息确定第二网络设备的位置,再确定第一区域中的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。Exemplarily, the position of the first network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the first network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device can be determined. Similarly, the position of the second network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the second network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device can be determined.
示例性的,第一区域中的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延等于第一区域中的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的距离除以光速。第一区域中的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延等于第一区域中的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的距离除以光速。Exemplarily, the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device is equal to the distance between the reference position in the first area and the first network device divided by the speed of light. The propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device is equal to the distance between the reference position in the first area and the second network device divided by the speed of light.
示例性的,参考时刻和偏移可以为通用协调时(universal time chiming,UTC),或者,参考时刻和偏移的单位可以为系统帧号、子帧号、时隙号、正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号等。参考时刻可以是终端设备自行确定的,或者可以是第一网络设备配置的,不予限制。Exemplarily, the reference time and the offset may be universal time chiming (UTC), or the units of the reference time and the offset may be system frame number, subframe number, time slot number, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol, etc. The reference time may be determined by the terminal device itself, or may be configured by the first network device, without limitation.
示例性的,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移也可以称为同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)测量定时配置(SSB measurement timing configuration,SMTC)偏移(offset)。Exemplarily, the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time may also be referred to as a synchronization signal block (SSB) measurement timing configuration (SMTC) offset.
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式一和方式二可以结合,例如终端设备可以在第一小区的剩余服务时间结束之前,在第一时间窗内第二网络设备进行邻区测量。In a possible implementation, the above-mentioned method 1 and method 2 may be combined. For example, the terminal device may perform neighboring cell measurement on the second network device within the first time window before the remaining service time of the first cell ends.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一仰角、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息可以是第一网络设备向终端设备指示的。例如,第一信息还指示以下至少一项:仰角信息、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息。其中,仰角信息指示第一仰角。当然,第一网络设备可以通过第一信息外的其他信息指示上述至少一项,不予限制。In a possible implementation, the first elevation angle, the ephemeris information of the first network device, or the ephemeris information of the second network device may be indicated by the first network device to the terminal device. For example, the first information further indicates at least one of the following: elevation angle information, ephemeris information of the first network device, or ephemeris information of the second network device. Among them, the elevation angle information indicates the first elevation angle. Of course, the first network device may indicate at least one of the above items through other information other than the first information, without limitation.
此外,第一信息还可以指示参考区域的标识。参考区域为第一小区中的一个区域,或者说为第一小区的覆盖区域或服务区域中的一个区域。示例性的,参考区域可以为第一小区的小区中心所在的区域。 In addition, the first information may also indicate an identifier of a reference area. The reference area is an area in the first cell, or an area in the coverage area or service area of the first cell. Exemplarily, the reference area may be an area where the cell center of the first cell is located.
在第一信息指示参考区域的标识的情况下,上述步骤S1203可以不执行,上述步骤S1204中,终端设备根据参考区域的标识进行移动性管理。示例性的,终端设备根据参考区域的标识进行移动管理的实现,与终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理的实现类似,可以将上述方式一或方式二中的第一区域替换为参考区域理解,在此不再赘述。In the case where the first information indicates the identifier of the reference area, the above step S1203 may not be performed, and in the above step S1204, the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the reference area. Exemplarily, the implementation of the terminal device performing mobility management according to the identifier of the reference area is similar to the implementation of the terminal device performing mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, and the first area in the above method 1 or method 2 can be replaced by the reference area, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式一中,由于终端设备在第一小区的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量,而第一小区是否被覆盖由网络设备的移动决定,因此,方式一可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。In a possible implementation, in the above-mentioned method 1, since the terminal device starts the neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first cell ends, and whether the first cell is covered is determined by the movement of the network device, therefore, method 1 can be applicable to the scenario where the cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
此外,上述方式二中,终端设备在第一时间窗内进行邻区测量,且第一时间窗的起始时刻与终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延相关,由于网络设备的移动,在不同时间网络设备可能位于不同位置,从而终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延随时间变化,因此,方式二也可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。In addition, in the above-mentioned method 2, the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurement within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located at different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device varies with time. Therefore, method 2 can also be applied to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
方式三、终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:在以下至少一项满足的情况下,终端设备进行邻区测量,或启动邻区测量:Mode 3: The terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: when at least one of the following is met, the terminal device performs neighboring area measurement, or starts neighboring area measurement:
1)至少一个第二区域的标识中不包括第一区域的标识。1) The identifier of at least one second area does not include the identifier of the first area.
其中,第二区域为被第一网络设备的波束服务的区域,或者说第二区域为激活区域。该条件1)也可以理解为:至少一个第二区域中不包括第一区域,或者,被第一网络设备的波束服务的区域不包括第一区域,或者,第一区域不被第一网络设备的波束所服务。The second area is the area served by the beam of the first network device, or the second area is the activated area. Condition 1) can also be understood as: at least one second area does not include the first area, or the area served by the beam of the first network device does not include the first area, or the first area is not served by the beam of the first network device.
2)第一区域中的参考位置与第三区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限。2) The distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
其中,第一区域中的参考位置是根据第一区域的标识确定的,可参考上述相关说明。第三区域为至少一个第二区域中的边缘区域。The reference position in the first area is determined according to the identification of the first area, and reference may be made to the above related description. The third area is an edge area in at least one second area.
作为一种可能的实现,边缘区域可以为至少一个第二区域中,参考位置与终端设备之间的距离最大的区域。示例性的,第三区域也可以称为至少一个第二区域中的边缘区域。As a possible implementation, the edge area may be an area in the at least one second area where the distance between the reference position and the terminal device is the largest. Exemplarily, the third area may also be referred to as an edge area in the at least one second area.
示例性的,以第一网络设备的波束服务3个第二区域,分别记为第二区域1、第二区域2以及第三区域3为例,若终端设备与这3个第二区域中的参考位置之间的距离分别为10km、20km、15km,那么,第三区域即为第二区域2。For example, taking the case where the beam of the first network device serves three second areas, which are respectively recorded as second area 1, second area 2 and third area 3, if the distance between the terminal device and the reference positions in the three second areas are 10km, 20km and 15km respectively, then the third area is the second area 2.
作为另一种可能的实现,边缘区域可以为至少一个第二区域中,参考位置与第一网络设备的覆盖区域的中心位置之间的距离最大的区域。As another possible implementation, the edge area may be an area in the at least one second area where the distance between the reference position and the central position of the coverage area of the first network device is the largest.
3)第一区域中的参考位置与参考区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限。3) The distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
其中,第一区域中的参考位置是根据第一区域的标识确定的,可参考上述相关说明。参考区域为第一小区中的一个区域,或者说为第一小区的覆盖区域或服务区域中的一个区域。第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区,第一小区可以为终端设备当前的服务小区。示例性的,参考区域可以为第一小区的小区中心所在的区域。参考区域的位置可以根据参考区域的标识确定。Among them, the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identification of the first area, and the above-mentioned relevant instructions can be referred to. The reference area is an area in the first cell, or an area in the coverage area or service area of the first cell. The first cell is a cell managed by the first network device, and the first cell can be the current service cell of the terminal device. Exemplarily, the reference area can be the area where the cell center of the first cell is located. The position of the reference area can be determined according to the identification of the reference area.
4)第一区域的标识与参考区域的标识之差大于或等于第一门限。4) The difference between the identifier of the first area and the identifier of the reference area is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
5)参考区域中的参考位置与终端设备的位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限。5) The distance between the reference position in the reference area and the position of the terminal device is greater than or equal to a first threshold.
6)终端设备的位置与第三区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限。6) The distance between the location of the terminal device and the reference location in the third area is greater than or equal to the first threshold.
可以理解的,上述条件1)至条件6)中,不同条件下第一门限的取值可以相同也可以不同。例如,条件2)和条件3)中第一门限的取值相同,条件2)和条件4)中第一门限的取值不同。It is understandable that in the above conditions 1) to 6), the values of the first threshold under different conditions may be the same or different. For example, the values of the first threshold in conditions 2) and 3) are the same, and the values of the first threshold in conditions 2) and 4) are different.
在一种可能的实施方式中,至少一个第二区域、参考区域或第一门限可以是第一网络设备向终端设备指示的。例如,第一信息还指示以下至少一项:区域图样、参考区域的标识或第一门限。其中,区域图样指示至少一个第二区域的标识。当然,第一网络设备可以通过第一信息外的其他信息指示上述至少一项,不予限制。In a possible implementation, at least one second area, reference area or first threshold may be indicated by the first network device to the terminal device. For example, the first information further indicates at least one of the following: an area pattern, an identifier of the reference area or the first threshold. The area pattern indicates an identifier of at least one second area. Of course, the first network device may indicate at least one of the above items through other information other than the first information, without limitation.
作为一种可能的实现,区域图样可以包括至少一个第二区域中每个第二区域的标识。即,区域图样包括被第一网络设备的波束服务的各个区域的标识。As a possible implementation, the area pattern may include an identifier of each second area in the at least one second area. That is, the area pattern includes identifiers of each area served by the beam of the first network device.
或者,区域图样可以为比特位图,该比特位图包括M个比特,M为第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域包括的区域总数,M为正整数。其中,M个比特与第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域包括的M个区域一一对应,第m个比特被设置为预设数值的情况下,第m个比特对应的区域为第一网络设备的波束服务的区域,或者说第m个比特对应的区域为第二区域或激活区域;第m个比特未被设置为预设数值的情况下,第m个比特对应的区域不是第一网络设备的波束服务的区域,或者说第m个比特对应的区域不是第二区域或激活区域。m=1,2,…,M。 Alternatively, the area pattern may be a bitmap, which includes M bits, where M is the total number of areas included in the coverage area or service area of the first network device, and M is a positive integer. The M bits correspond one-to-one to the M areas included in the coverage area or service area of the first network device. When the mth bit is set to a preset value, the area corresponding to the mth bit is the area served by the beam of the first network device, or the area corresponding to the mth bit is the second area or the activation area; when the mth bit is not set to a preset value, the area corresponding to the mth bit is not the area served by the beam of the first network device, or the area corresponding to the mth bit is not the second area or the activation area. m=1,2,…,M.
示例性的,预设数值可以为1,相应的,非预设数值可以为0;或者,预设数值可以为0,相应的,非预设数值可以为1。Exemplarily, the preset value may be 1, and correspondingly, the non-preset value may be 0; or, the preset value may be 0, and correspondingly, the non-preset value may be 1.
此外,在区域图样为比特位图的情况下,第一网络设备可以预先向终端设备指示第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的区域。例如,向终端设备发送第一网络设的覆盖区域或服务区域中的各个区域的标识。以第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域包括标识为1至100的区域为例,第一网络设备可以预先向终端设备发送标识{1,2,…,100}。In addition, when the area pattern is a bitmap, the first network device may indicate the area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device to the terminal device in advance. For example, the identifiers of each area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device are sent to the terminal device. Taking the example that the coverage area or service area of the first network device includes areas identified as 1 to 100, the first network device may send identifiers {1, 2, ..., 100} to the terminal device in advance.
作为一种可能的实现,关于第一门限的指示,第一网络设备可以向终端设备发送第一门限的取值;或者,第一网络设备可以向终端设备指示一个单位值,第一门限可以为该单位值与区域半径的乘积。As a possible implementation, regarding the indication of the first threshold, the first network device may send the value of the first threshold to the terminal device; or, the first network device may indicate a unit value to the terminal device, and the first threshold may be the product of the unit value and the area radius.
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式三中的条件与终端设备的位置相关,在终端设备处于不同位置时,上述条件的满足情况可能不同。因此,上述方式三可以适用于终端设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。示例性的,如图17所示,椭圆形实线表示第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域,椭圆形实线中的正六边形表示覆盖区域或服务区域中的区域。终端设备沿箭头方向移动的情况下,终端设备的位置以及终端设备所处的区域发生变化,从而导致上述方式三所述条件的满足情况发生变化。In a possible implementation, the conditions in the above-mentioned method three are related to the location of the terminal device, and when the terminal device is in different locations, the satisfaction of the above-mentioned conditions may be different. Therefore, the above-mentioned method three can be applicable to the scenario where the movement of the terminal device triggers cell reselection. For example, as shown in Figure 17, the elliptical solid line represents the coverage area or service area of the first network device, and the regular hexagon in the elliptical solid line represents the area in the coverage area or service area. When the terminal device moves in the direction of the arrow, the location of the terminal device and the area where the terminal device is located change, resulting in changes in the satisfaction of the conditions described in the above-mentioned method three.
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式三中,第一网络设备还可以向终端设备指示以下至少一项:第一网络设备的星历信息、第二网络设备的星历信息或重选相关的测量信息,如频率优先级、邻区频点或邻区的天线极化方式等。In a possible implementation, in the above-mentioned method three, the first network device can also indicate at least one of the following to the terminal device: the ephemeris information of the first network device, the ephemeris information of the second network device, or the measurement information related to the reselection, such as the frequency priority, the frequency point of the neighboring area, or the antenna polarization mode of the neighboring area.
方式四、如图18所示,终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:Mode 4: As shown in FIG. 18 , the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
S120431、终端设备确定至少一个第四区域的标识中是否包括第一区域的标识。S120431. The terminal device determines whether an identifier of at least one fourth area includes an identifier of the first area.
其中,第四区域为Nspot个区域中能够被第一网络设备覆盖的区域,或者说,第四区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的区域;或者,第四区域为Nspot个区域中能够被第一网络设备的波束服务的区域,或者说,第四区域为第一网络设备的服务区域中的区域。Among them, the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be covered by the first network device, or in other words, the fourth area is an area within the coverage area of the first network device; or, the fourth area is an area among N spot areas that can be served by the beam of the first network device, or in other words, the fourth area is an area within the service area of the first network device.
可以理解的,上述至少一个第四区域指第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的部分或全部区域。示例性的,以第一网络设备的覆盖区域包括区域1至100为例,上述至少一个第四区域可以为区域20至30,或者为区域25-40等,不予限制。It can be understood that the at least one fourth area refers to part or all of the coverage area or service area of the first network device. Exemplarily, taking the coverage area of the first network device including areas 1 to 100 as an example, the at least one fourth area can be areas 20 to 30, or areas 25-40, etc., without limitation.
在一种可能的实施方式中,该步骤S120431也可以理解为:终端设备确定至少一个第四区域中是否包括第一区域。In a possible implementation manner, step S120431 may also be understood as: the terminal device determines whether at least one fourth area includes the first area.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在步骤S120431之前,第一网络设备向终端设备指示至少一个第四区域的标识。进一步的,第一网络设备还向终端设备指示至少一个第四区域分别对应的接入信息。其中,第四区域对应的接入信息用于该第四区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。In a possible implementation, before step S120431, the first network device indicates an identifier of at least one fourth area to the terminal device. Further, the first network device also indicates access information corresponding to at least one fourth area to the terminal device. The access information corresponding to the fourth area is used for the terminal device in the fourth area to access the second network device.
示例性的,第一网络设备可以通过第一信息向终端设备指示至少一个第四区域的标识及其分别对应的接入信息。即,第一信息还指示至少一个第四区域的标识及其分别对应的接入信息。Exemplarily, the first network device may indicate the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding thereto to the terminal device through the first information. That is, the first information also indicates the identifier of at least one fourth area and the access information corresponding thereto.
示例性的,接入信息包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备的标识、目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码。目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。随机接入资源可以包括随机接入时机(RACH occasion,RO),RO指示随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)占用的时域和/或频域资源。随机接入前导码可以为小区切换过程中的专用前导码。Exemplarily, the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of the target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble. The target beam is a beam of the second network device. The random access resource may include a random access occasion (RACH occasion, RO), and the RO indicates the time domain and/or frequency domain resources occupied by the random access channel (random access channel, RACH). The random access preamble may be a dedicated preamble in a cell switching process.
可选的,不同第四区域对应的接入信息可以不同,例如,不同第四区域对应的随机接入资源和/或第二网络设备可以不同。示例性的,如图19所示,以至少一个第四区域包括第四区域1和第四区域2为例,假设第四区域1对应的接入信息包括第二网络设备1的标识和随机接入资源1,第四区域2对应的接入信息包括第二网络设备2的标识和随机接入资源2,其中,第二网络设备1和第二网络设备2为不同的网络设备,随机接入资源1和随机接入资源2的时域位置和/或频域位置不同。那么,第四区域1中的终端设备可以使用随机接入资源1接入第二网络设备1,第四区域2中的终端设备可以使用随机接入资源2接入第二网络设备2。Optionally, the access information corresponding to different fourth areas may be different, for example, the random access resources and/or second network devices corresponding to different fourth areas may be different. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG19, taking at least one fourth area including fourth area 1 and fourth area 2 as an example, assuming that the access information corresponding to fourth area 1 includes the identifier of second network device 1 and random access resource 1, and the access information corresponding to fourth area 2 includes the identifier of second network device 2 and random access resource 2, wherein second network device 1 and second network device 2 are different network devices, and the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of random access resource 1 and random access resource 2 are different. Then, the terminal device in fourth area 1 can use random access resource 1 to access second network device 1, and the terminal device in fourth area 2 can use random access resource 2 to access second network device 2.
作为一种可能的实现,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息可以携带在媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)中。示例性的,如图20所示,为一种可能的MAC PDU的帧结构。As a possible implementation, the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area can be carried in a media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU). For example, as shown in FIG20, a possible frame structure of a MAC PDU is shown.
参见图20,MAC PDU包括至少一个MAC子PDU(MAC subPDU)。MAC subPDU分为包含MAC控制元素(control element,CE)的MAC subPDU、包含MAC业务数据单元(service data unit,SDU)的MAC subPDU以及包含填充(padding)的MAC subPDU(可选)。其中,包含MAC CE的MAC subPDU包括子头(subheader)和MAC CE。包含MAC PDU的MAC subPDU包括子头和MAC SDU。 Referring to Figure 20, the MAC PDU includes at least one MAC subPDU (MAC subPDU). The MAC subPDU is divided into a MAC subPDU including a MAC control element (CE), a MAC subPDU including a MAC service data unit (SDU), and a MAC subPDU including padding (optional). Among them, the MAC subPDU including a MAC CE includes a subheader and a MAC CE. The MAC subPDU including a MAC PDU includes a subheader and a MAC SDU.
示例性的,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息可以位于MAC PDU的子头中,如位于包含MAC PDU的MAC subPDU的子头中;Exemplarily, the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area may be located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, such as in a subheader of a MAC subPDU containing the MAC PDU;
或者,第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中;Alternatively, the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area are located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU;
或者,第四区域的标识位于MAC PDU的子头中,如位于包含MAC PDU的MAC subPDU的子头中;第四区域对应的接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中。Alternatively, the identifier of the fourth area is located in a subheader of the MAC PDU, such as in a subheader of a MAC subPDU containing the MAC PDU; the access information corresponding to the fourth area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
可选的,不同第四区域的标识及其对应的接入信息可以位于不同的MAC PDU中,或者,也可以位于相同的MAC PDU中,不予限制。例如,第四区域1的标识及其对应的接入信息位于MAC subPDU1中,第四区域2的标识及其对应的接入信息位于MAC subPDU2中;或者,第四区域1及其对应的接入信息和第四区域2及其对应的接入信息均位于MAC subPDU1中。Optionally, the identifiers of different fourth regions and their corresponding access information may be located in different MAC PDUs, or may be located in the same MAC PDU, without limitation. For example, the identifier of the fourth region 1 and its corresponding access information are located in MAC subPDU1, and the identifier of the fourth region 2 and its corresponding access information are located in MAC subPDU2; or, the fourth region 1 and its corresponding access information and the fourth region 2 and its corresponding access information are both located in MAC subPDU1.
在一种可能的实施方式中,除第四区域的标识和第四区域对应的接入信息外,第一网络设备还指示终端设备的标识或终端设备组的标识。第四区域中的终端设备收到第一网络设备的指示后,若第一网络设备指示的终端设备的标识包括自身的标识,或者包括自身所属终端设备组的标识,则该终端设备根据第四区域对应的接入信息接入其他网络设备。In a possible implementation, in addition to the identifier of the fourth area and the access information corresponding to the fourth area, the first network device also indicates the identifier of the terminal device or the identifier of the terminal device group. After the terminal device in the fourth area receives the indication from the first network device, if the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes its own identifier, or includes the identifier of the terminal device group to which it belongs, the terminal device accesses other network devices according to the access information corresponding to the fourth area.
或者,第一网络设备可以向同一第四区域中的不同终端设备或终端设备组指示不同的接入信息,如指示不同的随机接入资源、不同的目标网络设备等。Alternatively, the first network device may indicate different access information to different terminal devices or terminal device groups in the same fourth area, such as indicating different random access resources, different target network devices, etc.
在一种可能的实施方式中,由于第四区域中的终端设备会接入其他网络设备,因此,第一网络设备向终端设备指示的第四区域的标识、终端设备设备的标识或终端设备组的标识,可以理解为切换命令,用于指示第四区域中的终端设备接入其他网络设备。In a possible implementation, since the terminal devices in the fourth area will access other network devices, the identifier of the fourth area, the identifier of the terminal device, or the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device to the terminal device can be understood as a switching command, which is used to instruct the terminal devices in the fourth area to access other network devices.
S120432、若至少一个第四区域的标识包括第一区域的标识,终端设备根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。S120432: If the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area, the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
示例性的,若至少一个第四区域的标识包括第一区域的标识,则表示第一网络设备指示第一区域中的终端设备接入其他网络设备或进行小区切换,从而终端设备可以根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。Exemplarily, if the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area, it means that the first network device instructs the terminal device in the first area to access other network devices or perform cell switching, so that the terminal device can access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
作为一种可能的实现,若第一网络设备还指示终端设备的标识或终端设备组的标识,则在至少一个第四区域的标识包括第一区域的标识的情况下,终端设备还需要判断第一网络设备指示的终端设备的标识是否包括自身的标识,或者判断第一网络设备指示的终端设备组的标识是否包括自身所属终端设备组的标识,若是,则根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。As a possible implementation, if the first network device also indicates the identifier of the terminal device or the identifier of the terminal device group, then when the identifier of at least one fourth area includes the identifier of the first area, the terminal device also needs to determine whether the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes its own identifier, or determine whether the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device includes the identifier of the terminal device group to which it belongs. If so, access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
示例性的,根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备可以包括:在该接入信息指示的随机接入资源上,使用目标波束对应的发送波束,向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导码。Exemplarily, according to the access information corresponding to the first area, accessing the second network device may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using a transmission beam corresponding to a target beam on a random access resource indicated by the access information.
基于该方式四,第一网络设备可以向终端设备指示第四区域的标识及其对应的接入信息,使得第四区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入其他网络设备。此外,第一网络设备可以为不同的第四区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第四区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入其他网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on the fourth method, the first network device can indicate the identifier of the fourth area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device in the fourth area can access other network devices according to the access information. In addition, the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different fourth areas, so that terminal devices in different fourth areas can access other network devices on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
在上述方式一至方式四中,上述区域总数和/或区域的半径可以理解为第一网络设备生效或使用的区域总数和/或区域的半径。此时,第一区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中,终端设备所处的区域。此外,上述区域总数和/或区域的半径也可以为第二网络设备生效或使用的区域总数和/或区域的半径。此时,终端设备可以采用如下方式五进行移动性管理。In the above-mentioned methods 1 to 4, the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area can be understood as the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area in which the first network device is effective or used. At this time, the first area is the area where the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the first network device. In addition, the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area can also be the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area in which the second network device is effective or used. At this time, the terminal device can use the following method 5 for mobility management.
方式五、如图21所示,终端设备根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:Mode 5: As shown in FIG. 21 , the terminal device performs mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including:
S120441、终端设备根据第一区域的标识,接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息。S120441. The terminal device receives second information from the second network device according to the identifier of the first area.
其中,第一区域为第二网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中终端设备所处的区域。第二信息指示第一区域对应的接入信息,该接入信息用于第一区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。The first area is the area where the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the second network device. The second information indicates access information corresponding to the first area, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the first area to access the second network device.
示例性的,该接入信息包括以下至少一项:目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码。随机接入资源或随机接入前导码可参考上述步骤S120431中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, the access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble. The random access resource or the random access preamble may refer to the relevant description in the above step S120431, which will not be described here.
示例性的,目标波束可以为第二网络设备的切换(handover,HO)-SSB对应的波束。HO-SSB用于移动性管理。除HO-SSB外,第二网络设备还可以发送传统SSB,传统SSB可以用于接入第二网络设备。Exemplarily, the target beam may be a beam corresponding to a handover (HO)-SSB of the second network device. HO-SSB is used for mobility management. In addition to HO-SSB, the second network device may also send a traditional SSB, which may be used to access the second network device.
通常,传统SSB的周期是固定的(如传统SSB的周期一般为5/10/20/40/80/160ms),且传统SSB的周期较短,第二网络设备可能基于固定的周期频繁地向终端设备发送传统SSB。HO-SSB的周期为可调节的(如HO-SSB的周期的范围可以为几秒~几百秒之间),HO-SSB的周期跨度较大,且HO-SSB的周期相较于传统SSB的周期较长,第二网络设备可以隔几秒或者几百秒的时间发送一次HO-SSB。 Generally, the period of the traditional SSB is fixed (such as the period of the traditional SSB is generally 5/10/20/40/80/160ms), and the period of the traditional SSB is relatively short. The second network device may frequently send the traditional SSB to the terminal device based on the fixed period. The period of HO-SSB is adjustable (such as the period of HO-SSB can range from a few seconds to hundreds of seconds), the period span of HO-SSB is relatively large, and the period of HO-SSB is relatively long compared to the period of the traditional SSB. The second network device can send HO-SSB every few seconds or hundreds of seconds.
此外,传统SSB的服务区域和HO-SSB服务的区域也不同。HO-SSB一般服务即将进行小区切换/小区重选的区域中,随着第二网络设备的移动,HO-SSB服务的区域也在变化。In addition, the service area of the traditional SSB is different from the service area of the HO-SSB. The HO-SSB generally serves the area where the cell switching/cell reselection is about to be performed. As the second network device moves, the service area of the HO-SSB also changes.
作为一种可能的实现,第二网络设备可以通过物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)承载第二信息。进一步的,该PDCCH可以采用第一区域的标识加扰。因此,终端设备根据第一区域的标识,接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息,可以包括:终端设备根据第一区域的标识解析该PDCCH,从而获取PDCCH中承载的第二信息。As a possible implementation, the second network device may carry the second information through a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). Further, the PDCCH may be scrambled using the identifier of the first region. Therefore, the terminal device receives the second information from the second network device according to the identifier of the first region, which may include: the terminal device parses the PDCCH according to the identifier of the first region, thereby obtaining the second information carried in the PDCCH.
可选的,第二网络设备可以通过不同的PDCCH发送不同区域对应的接入信息。进一步的,不同PDCCH可以采用相应区域的标识加扰,例如,PDCCH#1承载区域1对应的接入信息,PDCCH#2承载区域2对应的接入信息,则PDCCH#1采用区域1的标识加扰,PDCCH#2采用区域2的标识加扰。不同区域对应的接入信息可以不同。Optionally, the second network device may send access information corresponding to different areas through different PDCCHs. Further, different PDCCHs may be encrypted using the identifiers of the corresponding areas. For example, if PDCCH#1 carries access information corresponding to area 1 and PDCCH#2 carries access information corresponding to area 2, PDCCH#1 is encrypted using the identifier of area 1 and PDCCH#2 is encrypted using the identifier of area 2. The access information corresponding to different areas may be different.
S120442、终端设备根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。S120442. The terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
示例性的,终端设备根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备可以包括:在该接入信息指示的随机接入资源上,使用目标波束对应的发送波束,向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导码。Exemplarily, the terminal device accessing the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using a transmitting beam corresponding to a target beam on a random access resource indicated by the access information.
示例性的,可以认为上述方式五对应的方案适用于以下场景:终端设备首先接入第一网络设备,在第一网络设备保持RRC连接态。后续第一网络设备向终端设备指示第二网络设备生效或时域的区域总数和/或区域的半径,终端设备根据自身位置信息确定第二网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中,终端设备所处的区域(即第一区域)。再根据第一区域的标识接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息,根据第二信息指示的第一区域的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。即可以认为终端设备从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备。Exemplarily, it can be considered that the scheme corresponding to the above-mentioned method five is applicable to the following scenario: the terminal device first accesses the first network device and maintains the RRC connection state on the first network device. Subsequently, the first network device indicates to the terminal device the total number of areas and/or the radius of the area in which the second network device is effective or in the time domain, and the terminal device determines the area (i.e., the first area) where the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the second network device based on its own location information. Then, according to the identifier of the first area, the second information from the second network device is received, and according to the access information of the first area indicated by the second information, the second network device is accessed. That is, it can be considered that the terminal device switches from the first network device to the second network device.
基于该方式五,第二网络设备可以指示各个区域对应的接入信息,使得区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入第二网络设备。此外,第二网络设备可以为不同的区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第二网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on the fifth method, the second network device can indicate the access information corresponding to each area, so that the terminal device in the area can access the second network device according to the access information. In addition, the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different areas, so that the terminal devices in different areas can access the second network device on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式五所述的方案可以应用于如图22所示的切换流程。如图22所示,该切换流程包括如下步骤:In a possible implementation, the solution described in the fifth method above can be applied to the switching process shown in FIG22. As shown in FIG22, the switching process includes the following steps:
S2201、终端设备向第一网络设备发送测量报告和/或终端设备的位置信息。相应的,第一网络设备接收来自终端设备的测量报告和/或终端设备的位置信息。S2201. The terminal device sends a measurement report and/or location information of the terminal device to the first network device. Correspondingly, the first network device receives the measurement report and/or location information of the terminal device from the terminal device.
示例性的,测量报告包括传统SSB(如NR-SSB)的信号测量结果。终端设备的位置信息可以通过第一区域的信息指示,如通过第一区域的标识或第一区域中的参考位置指示。Exemplarily, the measurement report includes a signal measurement result of a conventional SSB (such as NR-SSB). The location information of the terminal device may be indicated by information of the first area, such as an identifier of the first area or a reference location indication in the first area.
可选的,在步骤S2201之前,第一网络设备可以向终端设备发送测量配置,终端设备可以根据测量配置进行测量,并上报测量结果。Optionally, before step S2201, the first network device may send a measurement configuration to the terminal device, and the terminal device may perform measurements according to the measurement configuration and report the measurement results.
可选的,第一网络设备收到测量报告和/或终端设备的位置信息后,可以进行层一/层二触发的移动性(layer1/layer 2triggered mobility,LTM)候选准备(candidate preparation)。Optionally, after receiving the measurement report and/or the location information of the terminal device, the first network device can perform layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM) candidate preparation.
S2202a、网络设备之间交互HO-SSB和切换相关的配置信息。S2202a. Network devices exchange HO-SSB and handover related configuration information.
示例性的,图22中以第一网络设备和第二网络设备进行交互为例进行说明。第一网络设备可以理解为源网络设备,第二网络设备可以理解为候选网络设备。当然,可以存在多个候选网络设备(图22未示出),该多个候选网络设备中存在一个目标网络设备。Exemplarily, FIG22 takes the interaction between the first network device and the second network device as an example for explanation. The first network device can be understood as a source network device, and the second network device can be understood as a candidate network device. Of course, there can be multiple candidate network devices (not shown in FIG22), and there is a target network device among the multiple candidate network devices.
示例性的,该配置信息可以包括以下至少一项:HO-SSB测量周期、测量持续时间、测量偏移、网络设备的星历信息或不同时间段对应的接入资源配置,如随机接入前导码索引、掩码索引、RO资源或无线网络临时标识符(radio network temporary identity,RNTI)等。Exemplarily, the configuration information may include at least one of the following: HO-SSB measurement period, measurement duration, measurement offset, ephemeris information of the network device, or access resource configuration corresponding to different time periods, such as random access preamble index, mask index, RO resources, or radio network temporary identity (RNTI).
S2202b、第一网络设备向终端设备发送LTM候选配置进而条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)触发条件。相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的LTM候选配置和CHO触发条件。S2202b, the first network device sends the LTM candidate configuration and the conditional handover (CHO) trigger condition to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the LTM candidate configuration and the CHO trigger condition from the first network device.
示例性的,LTM候选配置可以为LTM RRC相关配置,其中可以包括步骤S2202a中所述的至少一项信息。CHO触发条件用于判断是否进行小区切换。在CHO触发条件满足时,终端设备进行小区切换,在CHO触发条件不满足时,不进行小区切换。Exemplarily, the LTM candidate configuration may be an LTM RRC related configuration, which may include at least one of the information described in step S2202a. The CHO trigger condition is used to determine whether to perform a cell handover. When the CHO trigger condition is met, the terminal device performs a cell handover, and when the CHO trigger condition is not met, the cell handover is not performed.
示例性的,第一网络设备可以向终端设备发送RRC重配置(RRC reconfiguration)消息,在该RRC重配置消息中携带LTM候选配置和/或CHO触发条件。Exemplarily, the first network device may send an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, wherein the RRC reconfiguration message carries the LTM candidate configuration and/or the CHO trigger condition.
S2203、终端设备向第一网络设备发送RRC重配置完成(RRC reconfiguration complete)消息。相应的,第一网络设备接收来自终端设备的RRC重配置完成消息。S2203, the terminal device sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the first network device. Correspondingly, the first network device receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the terminal device.
S2204a、终端设备根据第二网络设备的HO-SSB,与第二网络设备进行下行同步。 S2204a. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization with the second network device according to the HO-SSB of the second network device.
示例性的,终端设备可以接收第二网络设备的HO-SSB,并根据其中携带的同步信号,与第二网络设备进行下行同步。Exemplarily, the terminal device may receive the HO-SSB from the second network device, and perform downlink synchronization with the second network device according to the synchronization signal carried therein.
S2204b、终端设备获取第二网络设备的定时信息。S2204b. The terminal device obtains timing information of the second network device.
示例性的,定时信息可以为定时提前(timing advance,TA)量。终端设备可以基于第二网络设备的星历信息、终端设备的位置信息等确定该TA。获取第二网络设备的定时信息后,可以认为终端设备和第二网络设备完成了上行同步。Exemplarily, the timing information may be a timing advance (TA). The terminal device may determine the TA based on the ephemeris information of the second network device, the location information of the terminal device, etc. After acquiring the timing information of the second network device, it may be considered that the terminal device and the second network device have completed uplink synchronization.
S2205、终端设备执行基于第二网络设备的HO-SSB的层一/层三测量。S2205. The terminal device performs layer 1/layer 3 measurement based on HO-SSB of the second network device.
示例性的,终端设备可以根据上述步骤S220b中配置的HO-SSB测量周期、测量持续时间、测量偏移等测量第二网络设备的HO-SSB。Exemplarily, the terminal device may measure the HO-SSB of the second network device according to the HO-SSB measurement period, measurement duration, measurement offset, etc. configured in the above step S220b.
示例性的,获得HO-SSB的测量结果后,终端设备可以进行LTM-CHO触发事件评估和LTM决策(LTM decision),即测量结果是否满足CHO触发条件。若测量结果满足CHO触发条件,终端设备确定进行小区切换;若测量结果不满足CHO触发条件,终端设备不进行小区切换,仍在第一网络设备保持RRC连接态。Exemplarily, after obtaining the measurement result of HO-SSB, the terminal device can perform LTM-CHO trigger event evaluation and LTM decision (LTM decision), that is, whether the measurement result meets the CHO trigger condition. If the measurement result meets the CHO trigger condition, the terminal device determines to perform cell switching; if the measurement result does not meet the CHO trigger condition, the terminal device does not perform cell switching and still maintains the RRC connection state in the first network device.
S2206、第二网络设备向终端设备发送第二信息。相应的,终端设备接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息。S2206: The second network device sends the second information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second information from the second network device.
其中,第二信息指示第一区域对应的接入信息,该接入信息用于第一区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。可参考上述步骤S120441中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。The second information indicates access information corresponding to the first area, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the first area to access the second network device. Please refer to the relevant description in the above step S120441, which will not be repeated here.
作为一种可能的实现,在测量结果满足CHO触发条件的情况下,终端设备确定进行小区切换,从而接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息。As a possible implementation, when the measurement result meets the CHO triggering condition, the terminal device determines to perform a cell handover, thereby receiving the second information from the second network device.
S2207、终端设备根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。可参考上述步骤S120442中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。S2207: The terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area. Please refer to the relevant description in the above step S120442, which will not be repeated here.
S2208、第二网络设备向终端设备发送LTM完成应答信息;相应的,终端设备接收来自第二网络设备的LTM完成应答信息。S2208. The second network device sends LTM completion response information to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the LTM completion response information from the second network device.
基于上述步骤,终端设备可以实现小区切换并接入第二网络设备。此外,终端设备根据第二网络设备指示的接入资源,接入第二网络设备。因此,第二网络设备可以为不同的区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第二网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on the above steps, the terminal device can implement cell switching and access the second network device. In addition, the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the access resources indicated by the second network device. Therefore, the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different areas, so that terminal devices in different areas can access the second network device on different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
可以理解的是,以上各个实施例中,由终端设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于该终端设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片、芯片系统、电路、逻辑模块、或软件)实现;由网络设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于该网络设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片、芯片系统、电路、逻辑模块、或软件)实现。其中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,或者,芯片系统可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。It is understandable that in the above embodiments, the methods and/or steps implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by components (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, logic modules, or software) that can be used in the terminal device; the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device may also be implemented by components (such as processors, chips, chip systems, circuits, logic modules, or software) that can be used in the network device. Among them, the chip system may be composed of chips, or the chip system may include chips and other discrete devices.
可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It is understandable that, in order to realize the above functions, the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the communication device according to the above method embodiment. For example, each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
通信装置图23示出了一种通信装置230的结构示意图。该通信装置230包括处理模块2301和收发模块2302。该通信装置230可以用于实现上述终端设备或网络设备的功能。Communication Device Figure 23 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 230. The communication device 230 includes a processing module 2301 and a transceiver module 2302. The communication device 230 can be used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device or network device.
在一些实施例中,该通信装置230还可以包括存储模块(图23中未示出),用于存储程序指令和数据。In some embodiments, the communication device 230 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 23 ) for storing program instructions and data.
在一些实施例中,收发模块2302,也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块2302可以由收发电路、收发机、收发器或者通信接口构成。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 2302 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit for implementing a sending and/or receiving function. The transceiver module 2302 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
在一些实施例中,收发模块2302,可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用于执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的接收和发送类的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程;处理模块2301,可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的处理类(例如确定等)的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。 In some embodiments, the transceiver module 2302 may include a receiving module and a sending module, which are respectively used to execute the receiving and sending steps performed by the network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described in this document; the processing module 2301 may be used to execute the processing steps (such as determination, etc.) performed by the network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described in this document.
示例性的,该通信装置230用于实现上述终端设备的功能时:Exemplarily, when the communication device 230 is used to implement the functions of the above terminal device:
收发模块2302,用于接收来自第一网络设备的第一信息,第一信息指示区域的信息,该区域相对地球固定,该区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的;根据终端设备的位置信息和第一信息确定第一区域的标识,第一区域为终端设备所处的区域;处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理。The transceiver module 2302 is used to receive the first information from the first network device, where the first information indicates information of an area, where the area is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the area is determined by an identifier of the area; the identifier of the first area is determined based on the location information of the terminal device and the first information, where the first area is the area where the terminal device is located; the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management based on the identifier of the first area.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识确定第一区域中的参考位置;处理模块2301,还用于根据第一区域中的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一仰角,确定第一小区的剩余服务时间;处理模块2301,还用于在剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。其中,第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角或第一区域对应的最小仰角。In one possible design, the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: the processing module 2301 is used to determine the reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; the processing module 2301 is also used to determine the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the first area, the ephemeris information of the first network device and the first elevation angle; the processing module 2301 is also used to start the neighboring area measurement before the remaining service time ends. The first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:处理模块2301,用于根据参考区域的标识和区域总数确定参考区域中的参考位置;处理模块2301,还用于根据参考区域中的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一仰角,确定第一小区的剩余服务时间;处理模块2301,还用于在剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。其中,第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角或第一区域对应的最小仰角。第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区。In one possible design, processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: processing module 2301 is used to determine the reference position in the reference area according to the identifier of the reference area and the total number of areas; processing module 2301 is also used to determine the remaining service time of the first cell according to the reference position in the reference area, the ephemeris information of the first network device and the first elevation angle; processing module 2301 is also used to start neighboring area measurement before the remaining service time ends. The first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first area. The first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识确定第一区域中的参考位置;处理模块2301,还用于在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。其中,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差,第一时延为第一区域中的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延,第二时延为第一区域中的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。In a possible design, the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: the processing module 2301 is used to determine the reference position in the first area according to the identifier of the first area; the processing module 2301 is also used to perform neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window. The offset between the start time and the reference time of the first time window is the difference between the first delay and the second delay, the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the first network device, and the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position in the first area and the second network device.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:处理模块2301,用于在以下至少一项满足的情况下,进行邻区测量:至少一个第二区域的标识中不包括第一区域的标识;或者,第一区域中的参考位置与第三区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限,第一区域中的参考位置是根据第一区域的标识确定的,第三区域为至少一个第二区域中的边缘区域;或者,第一区域中的参考位置与参考区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第一门限;或者,第一区域的标识与参考区域的标识之差大于或等于第一门限;终端设备的位置与第三区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于所述第一门限;或者,终端设备的位置与参考区域中的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于所述第一门限。In one possible design, a processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to an identifier of a first area, including: a processing module 2301 is used to perform neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the identifier of at least one second area does not include the identifier of the first area; or, the distance between a reference position in the first area and a reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the reference position in the first area is determined according to the identifier of the first area, and the third area is an edge area of at least one second area; or, the distance between the reference position in the first area and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the difference between the identifier of the first area and the identifier of the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the third area is greater than or equal to the first threshold; or, the distance between the position of the terminal device and the reference position in the reference area is greater than or equal to the first threshold.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:处理模块2301,用于确定至少一个第四区域的标识中是否包括第一区域的标识;处理模块2301,还用于在至少一个第四区域的标识包括第一区域的标识的情况下,根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, a processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to an identifier of a first area, including: a processing module 2301 is used to determine whether an identifier of at least one fourth area includes an identifier of the first area; and the processing module 2301 is also used to access a second network device according to access information corresponding to the first area when the identifier of at least one fourth area includes an identifier of the first area.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识进行移动性管理,包括:处理模块2301,用于根据第一区域的标识,通过收发模块2302,接收来自第二网络设备的第二信息,第二信息指示第一区域对应的接入信息,接入信息用于第一区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备;处理模块2301,还用于根据第一区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, the processing module 2301 is used to perform mobility management according to the identifier of the first area, including: the processing module 2301 is used to receive second information from the second network device through the transceiver module 2302 according to the identifier of the first area, the second information indicating access information corresponding to the first area, and the access information is used for the terminal device in the first area to access the second network device; the processing module 2301 is also used to access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first area.
该通信装置230用于实现上述第一网络设备的功能时:When the communication device 230 is used to implement the function of the first network device:
处理模块2301,用于获取第一信息,第一信息指示区域的信息,区域相对地球固定,区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的;收发模块2302,用于向终端设备发送第一信息。The processing module 2301 is used to obtain the first information, where the first information indicates information of a region, the region is fixed relative to the earth, and the geographical location of the region is determined by an identifier of the region; the transceiver module 2302 is used to send the first information to the terminal device.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant contents of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
在本申请中,该通信装置230可以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。In the present application, the communication device 230 may be presented in the form of dividing various functional modules in an integrated manner. The "module" here may refer to a specific application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and a memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, an integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
在一些实施例中,当图23中的通信装置230是芯片或芯片系统时,收发模块2302的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的输入输出接口(或通信接口)实现,处理模块2301的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的处理器(或者处理电路)实现。In some embodiments, when the communication device 230 in Figure 23 is a chip or a chip system, the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 2302 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or the chip system, and the function/implementation process of the processing module 2301 can be implemented through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or the chip system.
由于本实施例提供的通信装置230可执行上述方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the communication device 230 provided in this embodiment can execute the above method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
作为一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的终端设备或网络设备,还可以使用下述来实现:一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)、控制器、状态机、门逻辑、分立硬件部件、任何其它适合的电路、或者能够执行本申请通 篇所描述的各种功能的电路的任意组合。As a possible product form, the terminal device or network device described in the embodiment of the present application can also be implemented using the following: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), programmable logic devices (PLD), controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or devices capable of executing the present application. Any combination of circuits with various functions described in this article.
作为另一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的终端设备或网络设备,可以由一般性的总线体系结构来实现。为了便于说明,参见图24,图24是本申请实施例提供的通信装置2400的结构示意图,该通信装置2400包括处理器2401和收发器2402。该通信装置2400可以为终端设备,或其中的芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置2400可以为网络设备,或其中的芯片或芯片系统。图24仅示出了通信装置2400的主要部件。除处理器2401和收发器2402之外,所述通信装置还可以进一步包括存储器2403、以及输入输出装置(图未示意)。As another possible product form, the terminal device or network device described in the embodiment of the present application can be implemented by a general bus architecture. For ease of explanation, refer to Figure 24, which is a structural diagram of a communication device 2400 provided in an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 2400 includes a processor 2401 and a transceiver 2402. The communication device 2400 can be a terminal device, or a chip or chip system therein; or, the communication device 2400 can be a network device, or a chip or chip system therein. Figure 24 only shows the main components of the communication device 2400. In addition to the processor 2401 and the transceiver 2402, the communication device may further include a memory 2403, and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
可选的,处理器2401主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。存储器2403主要用于存储软件程序和数据。收发器2402可以包括射频电路和天线,射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。Optionally, the processor 2401 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The memory 2403 is mainly used to store the software program and data. The transceiver 2402 may include a radio frequency circuit and an antenna. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing radio frequency signals. The antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
可选的,处理器2401、收发器2402、以及存储器2403可以通过通信总线连接。Optionally, the processor 2401, the transceiver 2402, and the memory 2403 may be connected via a communication bus.
当通信装置开机后,处理器2401可以读取存储器2403中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器2401对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到通信装置时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器2401,处理器2401将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the communication device is turned on, the processor 2401 can read the software program in the memory 2403, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor 2401 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the communication device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 2401. The processor 2401 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
在另一种实现中,所述的射频电路和天线可以独立于进行基带处理的处理器而设置,例如在分布式场景中,射频电路和天线可以与独立于通信装置,呈拉远式的布置。In another implementation, the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the processor performing baseband processing. For example, in a distributed scenario, the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged remotely from the communication device.
在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到上述通信装置230可以采用图24所示的通信装置2400的形式。In some embodiments, in terms of hardware implementation, those skilled in the art may conceive that the communication device 230 may take the form of a communication device 2400 as shown in FIG. 24 .
作为一种示例,图23中的处理模块2301的功能/实现过程可以通过图24所示的通信装置2400中的处理器2401调用存储器2403中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图23中的收发模块2302的功能/实现过程可以通过图24所示的通信装置2400中的收发器2402来实现。As an example, the function/implementation process of the processing module 2301 in FIG23 can be implemented by the processor 2401 in the communication device 2400 shown in FIG24 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 2403. The function/implementation process of the transceiver module 2302 in FIG23 can be implemented by the transceiver 2402 in the communication device 2400 shown in FIG24.
作为又一种可能的产品形态,本申请中的终端设备或网络设备可以采用图25所示的组成结构,或者包括图25所示的部件。图25为本申请提供的一种通信装置2500的组成示意图,该通信装置2500可以为网络设备或者网络设备中的模块或芯片或片上系统;或者该通信装置2500可以为终端设备或者终端设备中的模块或芯片或片上系统。As another possible product form, the terminal device or network device in the present application may adopt the composition structure shown in Figure 25, or include the components shown in Figure 25. Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 2500 provided by the present application, and the communication device 2500 may be a network device or a module or chip or system on chip in a network device; or the communication device 2500 may be a terminal device or a module or chip or system on chip in a terminal device.
如图25所示,该通信装置2500包括至少一个处理器2501,以及至少一个通信接口(图25中仅是示例性的以包括一个通信接口2504,以及一个处理器2501为例进行说明)。可选的,该通信装置2500还可以包括通信总线2502和存储器2503。As shown in FIG. 25 , the communication device 2500 includes at least one processor 2501 and at least one communication interface (FIG. 25 is merely an example of a communication interface 2504 and a processor 2501). Optionally, the communication device 2500 may also include a communication bus 2502 and a memory 2503.
处理器2501可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、通用处理器、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理器(digital signal processing,DSP)、微处理器、微控制器、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或它们的任意组合。处理器2501还可以是其它具有处理功能的装置,例如电路、器件或软件模块,不予限制。Processor 2501 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a network processor (NP), a digital signal processor (DSP), a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device (PLD), or any combination thereof. Processor 2501 may also be other devices with processing functions, such as circuits, devices, or software modules, without limitation.
通信总线2502用于连接通信装置2500中的不同组件,使得不同组件可以通信。通信总线2502可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。该总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图25中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The communication bus 2502 is used to connect different components in the communication device 2500 so that the different components can communicate. The communication bus 2502 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus. The bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 25, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
通信接口2504,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。示例性的,通信接口2504可以模块、电路、收发器或者任何能够实现通信的装置。可选的,所述通信接口2504也可以是位于处理器2501内的输入输出接口,用以实现处理器的信号输入和信号输出。The communication interface 2504 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks. Exemplarily, the communication interface 2504 can be a module, a circuit, a transceiver, or any device capable of implementing communication. Optionally, the communication interface 2504 can also be an input and output interface located in the processor 2501 to implement signal input and signal output of the processor.
存储器2503,可以是具有存储功能的装置,用于存储指令和/或数据。其中,指令可以是计算机程序。The memory 2503 may be a device with a storage function, used to store instructions and/or data, wherein the instructions may be computer programs.
示例性的,存储器2503可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和/或指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,也可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和/或指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,还可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或其他磁存储设备 等,不予限制。Exemplarily, the memory 2503 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or a random access memory (RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and/or instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device. Etc., no restrictions.
需要指出的是,存储器2503可以独立于处理器2501存在,也可以和处理器2501集成在一起。存储器2503可以位于通信装置2500内,也可以位于通信装置2500外,不予限制。处理器2501,可以用于执行存储器2503中存储的指令,以实现本申请下述实施例提供的方法。It should be noted that the memory 2503 may exist independently of the processor 2501, or may be integrated with the processor 2501. The memory 2503 may be located inside the communication device 2500, or may be located outside the communication device 2500, without limitation. The processor 2501 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 2503 to implement the method provided in the following embodiments of the present application.
作为一种可选的实现方式,通信装置2500还可以包括输出设备2505和输入设备2506。输出设备2505和处理器2501通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备2505可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二极管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备2506和处理器2501通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备2506可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。As an optional implementation, the communication device 2500 may further include an output device 2505 and an input device 2506. The output device 2505 communicates with the processor 2501 and may display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 2505 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector. The input device 2506 communicates with the processor 2501 and may receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 2506 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到上述图23所示的通信装置230可以采用图25所示的通信装置2500的形式。In some embodiments, in terms of hardware implementation, those skilled in the art may conceive that the communication device 230 shown in FIG. 23 may take the form of the communication device 2500 shown in FIG. 25 .
作为一种示例,图23中的处理模块2301的功能/实现过程可以通过图25所示的通信装置2500中的处理器2501调用存储器2503中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图23中的收发模块2302的功能/实现过程可以通过图25所示的通信装置2500中的通信接口2504来实现。As an example, the function/implementation process of the processing module 2301 in FIG23 can be implemented by the processor 2501 in the communication device 2500 shown in FIG25 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 2503. The function/implementation process of the transceiver module 2302 in FIG23 can be implemented by the communication interface 2504 in the communication device 2500 shown in FIG25.
需要说明的是,图25所示的结构并不构成对网络设备的具体限定。比如,在本申请另一些实施例中,网络设备可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It should be noted that the structure shown in FIG. 25 does not constitute a specific limitation on the network device. For example, in other embodiments of the present application, the network device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange the components differently. The components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。In some embodiments, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing a method in any of the above method embodiments.
作为一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器,用于保存必要的计算机程序和数据。该计算机程序可以包括指令,处理器可以调用存储器中存储的计算机程序中的指令以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然,存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。As a possible implementation, the communication device further includes a memory. The memory is used to store necessary computer programs and data. The computer program may include instructions, and the processor may call the instructions in the computer program stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute the method in any of the above method embodiments. Of course, the memory may not be in the communication device.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括接口电路,该接口电路为代码/数据读写接口电路,该接口电路用于接收计算机执行指令(计算机执行指令存储在存储器中,可能直接从存储器读取,或可能经过其他器件)并传输至该处理器。As another possible implementation, the communication device also includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, which is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in a memory, may be read directly from the memory, or may pass through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
作为又一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括通信接口,该通信接口用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信。As another possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device.
可以理解的是,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统,该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that the communication device can be a chip or a chip system. When the communication device is a chip system, it can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices. The embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,该计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored. When the computer program or instruction is executed by a computer, the functions of any of the above method embodiments are implemented.
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。The present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that, for the sake of convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above may refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
可以理解,本申请中描述的系统、装置和方法也可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。It is understood that the systems, devices and methods described in the present application can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, i.e., they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed over multiple network units. The components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存 储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD))等。本申请实施例中,计算机可以包括前面所述的装置。In the above embodiments, all or part of the embodiments may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by a software program, all or part of the embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer program product. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated therein. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state drive (SSD)), etc. In the embodiment of the present application, the computer may include the device described above.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the present application is described herein in conjunction with various embodiments, in the process of implementing the claimed application, those skilled in the art may understand and implement other variations of the disclosed embodiments by viewing the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "one" or "an" does not exclude multiple situations. A single processor or other unit may implement several functions listed in a claim. Certain measures are recorded in different dependent claims, but this does not mean that these measures cannot be combined to produce good results.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Although the present application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it is obvious that various modifications and combinations may be made thereto without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Accordingly, this specification and the drawings are merely exemplary illustrations of the present application as defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to have covered any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the present application. Obviously, those skilled in the art may make various modifications and variations to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.
Claims (39)
The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL(xi)=(1-cosθi)/2
The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the projection RL(x i ,y i ) of the reference position on the unit square and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi ) = (1 - cosθi ) / 2
RL(xi)=i/Nspot
The method according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that the Cartesian coordinates RL (x i , y i ) of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi )=i/ Nspot
The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i))
The method according to claim 2 is characterized in that the area includes a reference position, and the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the area satisfy the following relationship:
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i))
The method according to any one of claims 2 to 7, characterized in that the radius of the area and the total number of areas satisfy the following relationship:
The method according to claim 22, characterized in that the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL(xi)=(1-cosθi)/2
The method according to claim 23, characterized in that the projection RL(x i ,y i ) of the reference position on the unit square and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi ) = (1 - cosθi ) / 2
RL(xi)=i/Nspot
The method according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that the Cartesian coordinates RL(x i ,y i ) of the reference position in the Fibonacci grid and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi )=i/ Nspot
The method according to claim 25, characterized in that the region includes a reference position, and the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i))
The method according to claim 22, characterized in that the area includes a reference position, and the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position and the identifier of the area satisfy the following relationship:
RL(i)=(lon(i),lat(i))
The method according to any one of claims 22 to 27, characterized in that the radius of the area and the total number of areas satisfy the following relationship:
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2023/122960 WO2025065652A1 (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2023-09-28 | Communication method and apparatus |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2023/122960 WO2025065652A1 (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2023-09-28 | Communication method and apparatus |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025065652A1 true WO2025065652A1 (en) | 2025-04-03 |
Family
ID=95204589
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2023/122960 Pending WO2025065652A1 (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2023-09-28 | Communication method and apparatus |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025065652A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20220086671A1 (en) * | 2019-01-08 | 2022-03-17 | Kt Corporation | Method for communicating through non-terrestrial network, and apparatus therefor |
| CN114424590A (en) * | 2019-09-29 | 2022-04-29 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method, device and system |
| CN114557064A (en) * | 2019-10-17 | 2022-05-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
| WO2022261948A1 (en) * | 2021-06-18 | 2022-12-22 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Random access method, and apparatus |
| CN116250279A (en) * | 2020-09-28 | 2023-06-09 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
-
2023
- 2023-09-28 WO PCT/CN2023/122960 patent/WO2025065652A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20220086671A1 (en) * | 2019-01-08 | 2022-03-17 | Kt Corporation | Method for communicating through non-terrestrial network, and apparatus therefor |
| CN114424590A (en) * | 2019-09-29 | 2022-04-29 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method, device and system |
| CN114557064A (en) * | 2019-10-17 | 2022-05-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
| CN116250279A (en) * | 2020-09-28 | 2023-06-09 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
| WO2022261948A1 (en) * | 2021-06-18 | 2022-12-22 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Random access method, and apparatus |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN116033502B (en) | Methods and devices for wireless communications | |
| CN115996402B (en) | Method and apparatus for wireless communication | |
| EP4075852A1 (en) | Information processing device, information processing method, terminal device, base station device, and program | |
| US20250184845A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for wireless communication | |
| WO2023273783A1 (en) | Positioning method, apparatus and system | |
| CN114303422A (en) | Communication control apparatus, communication control method, and communication method | |
| CN114641081A (en) | Wireless communication method and device | |
| US20250203473A1 (en) | Handover method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025016213A1 (en) | Handover method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025065652A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025065625A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025185663A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025065540A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025067361A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025059995A1 (en) | Communication method, and apparatus | |
| EP4615142A1 (en) | Random access resource determination method and communication apparatus | |
| EP4618624A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025108263A1 (en) | Information sending method and apparatus | |
| WO2025156964A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN119383683A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2025223273A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025218512A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025228091A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025223243A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025161543A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23953796 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |